CITROEN C4 PICASSO, C4 Picasso 2014, Grand C4 Picasso with 5 seats 2014, Grand C4 Picasso with 7 seats 2014 Owner's Handbook Manual

On-line owner's handbook

You can fi nd your handbook on the CITROËN website, under

"MyCitroën".

This personal and customisable space allows you to establish direct and special contact with CITROËN.

Referring to the owner's handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest information available, easily identi fi ed by the bookmark, associated with this symbol:

If the "MyCitroën" function is not available on the CITROËN public website for your country, you can fi nd your handbook at the following address:

http://service.citroen.com

Select:

The Vehicle documentation link in the home page (no registration is needed),

the language,

the vehicle, its body style,

the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.

You have access to your handbook on line, together with the latest information, identi fi ed by the symbol:

We draw your attention to the following...

Your vehicle is fitted with only some of the equipment described in this document, depending on the trim level, version and the specifications for the country in which it is sold.

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by CITROËN may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system. Please note this specific warning and contact a CITROËN dealer to be shown the recommended equipment and accessories.

Key safety warning additional information contributes to the protection of the environment refer to the page indicated

Key

This key will enable you to identify the special features of your vehicle:

C4 Picasso

Grand C4 Picasso

Grand C4 Picasso with 5 seats

Grand C4 Picasso with 7 seats

CITROËN has a presence on every continent, a complete product range, bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation, for a modern and creative approach to mobility.

We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.

At the wheel of your new vehicle, getting to know each system, each control, each setting, makes your trips, your journeys more comfortable and more enjoyable.

243

Happy motoring!

Contents

Familiarisation

Eco-driving

Monitoring

7-inch touch screen tablet 26

Instrument panels 33

Indicator and warning lamps

Adjustment buttons

38

54

Setting the date and time

Trip computer

57

59

Access

Electronic key - remote control 61

"Keyless Entry and Starting" system 64

Central locking

Doors

72

73

Boot

Motorised tailgate

Alarm

Electric windows

75

76

79

82

Comfort

Front seats

Rear seats

84

92

Seat modularity 99

Mirrors 101

Steering wheel adjustment 103

Ventilation 104

Heating

Manual dual-zone air conditioning

106

107

Dual-zone digital air conditioning 109

Rear screen demist - defrost 115

Scented air freshener 116

Interior fi ttings 118

Rear multimedia 127

Driving

Starting-switching off the engine with the electronic key 135

Starting-switching off the engine with the

"Keyless Entry and Starting" system 137

Electric parking brake 141

Hill start assist 148

5-speed manual gearbox 149

6-speed manual gearbox

6-speed electronic gearbox system

149

150

Automatic gearbox 154

Gear shift indicator 159

Stop & Start 160

Display of inter-vehicle time 163

Speed limiter

Cruise control

Active cruise control

168

171

174

Collision risk alert 182

Lane departure warning system 185

Blind spot sensors

Parking sensors

186

189

Reversing camera

360 Vision

Park Assist

191

192

194

Contents

Visibility

Lighting controls

Automatic illumination of headlamps

Automatic headlamp dipping

Daytime running lamps

202

207

208

210

Headlamp adjustment 211

Directional lighting

Wiper controls

213

214

Screenwash 216

Automatic rain sensitive wipers 217

Courtesy lamps

Panoramic sunroof

Interior mood lighting

219

220

221

Practical information

Temporary puncture repair kit

Changing a wheel

Snow chains

Changing a bulb

260

268

278

279

Changing a fuse 288

12 V battery

Energy economy mode

295

298

Changing a wiper blade

Towing the vehicle

Towing a trailer

Roof bars

Very cold climate screen

Accessories

299

300

302

304

306

307

Technical data

Petrol engines 323

Petrol weights 324

Diesel engines 325

Diesel weights 328

Dimensions 331

Identi fi cation markings 333

Safety

2

Hazard warning lamps 222

Horn 222

Emergency or assistance call

Warning triangle

223

223

Tyre under-in fl ation detection 224

ESC system 227

Seat belts 230

Airbags 235

Child seats 241

ISOFIX mountings 252

Child lock 259

Bonnet

Petrol engines

Diesel engines

Fuel

Misfuel prevention (Diesel)

Running out of fuel (Diesel)

Checking levels

Checks

Checks

310

311

312

313

315

317

318

321

Audio and telematics

Emergency or assistance

Touch screen tablet

335

337

Alphabetical index

Visual search

4

Familiarisation

Exterior

Electronic key: Keyless

Entry and Starting

Distance alert

Using a radar located at the front of the vehicle, this system provides:

- the , to help the driver maintain a safe distance between their vehicle and the one in front,

163

- the Collision risk alert , to warn the driver, in certain driving conditions, that their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front.

182

A system that allows the unlocking, locking and starting of the vehicle by keeping the key on your person and in the defined zone.

64

Active cruise control

This system makes it possible, in addition to automatically holding the vehicle at a speed programmed by the driver, to maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front, by using engine braking only. A radar is located at the front of the vehicle.

The driver can also programme an inter-vehicle time to maintain.

174

Exterior

Familiarisation

.

Stop & Start

This system puts the engine temporarily into standby during stops in the traffic (traffic lights, traffic jams, etc...). The engine restarts automatically as soon as you want to move off. The Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions, as well as noise levels when stationary.

160

Cornering lighting

At low speed, this additional lighting increases the driver's field of vision in corners, junctions, when parking... by switching on the corresponding front foglamp.

Directional lighting

This lighting system automatically turns the beams of the headlamps in the direction of a corner, to improve the quality of the lighting.

213

212

Automatic headlamps

System that automatically dips the headlamps according to the lighting and traffic conditions, using a camera located in the interior rear view mirror.

208

5

Familiarisation

Exterior

Reversing camera

This system is activated automatically on engaging reverse and provides an image in the instrument panel.

191

6

Park Assist

This system provides active assistance when parking: it detects a parking space and then controls the vehicle's steering to park the vehicle.

194

360 Vision

This system provides an image in the instrument panel of the near surroundings of your vehicle, using cameras located at the front and rear of the vehicle and under the door mirrors.

Front and rear parking sensors

This system provides warnings when manoeuvring forwards and backwards by detecting obstacles in front of and behind the vehicle.

189

Exterior

Blind spot sensors

In certain driving conditions, this system detects the presence of vehicles in the blind spots. You are alerted by the illumination of a warning lamp in the corresponding mirror.

186

Under-inflation detection

This system continuously monitors the pressures in the tyres and alerts you in the event of an under-inflated tyre.

224

Familiarisation

.

Motorised tailgate

This system simplifies the opening and closing of the boot by means of motorisation of the tailgate.

76

Temporary puncture repair kit

This kit is a complete system, consisting of a compressor and a sealant cartridge, for the temporary repair of a tyre.

260

7

8

Familiarisation

Access

Electronic key - Remote control

A.

Unlocking the vehicle.

B.

Locking the vehicle.

C.

Unlocking of the vehicle and, depending on version, release of or opening the motorised tailgate.

61

Keyless Entry and Starting

Unlocking - opening

With the electronic key on your person, in the defined zone A , pass a hand behind one of the front door handles to unlock the vehicle, then pull the door handle to open the door or press the opening control on the tailgate.

Motorised tailgate

This system allows the tailgate to be opened remotely using motorisation.

The motorisation of the tailgate can be activated or deactivated.

Ensure that there is enough space behind the vehicle for the movement of the tailgate.

76

Fuel tank

Locking

With the electronic key in the defined zone A , press with a finger or thumb on one of the front door handles (at the markings) to lock the vehicle or on the opening control on the tailgate.

64

With the vehicle unlocked, press on the rear of the filler flap to open it.

Tank capacity: around 57 litres (petrol) or

55 litres (Diesel).

313

Interior

Panoramic sunroof

This glazed roof increases the light in the passenger compartment. It is fitted with an electric blind.

220

Familiarisation

.

7-inch touch screen tablet

It provides access to the heating and air conditioning controls, to settings for vehicle systems, to controls for the audio, navigation and telematic systems and to the display configuration settings...

26

Massage system

This system provides a lumbar massage for a period of about 60 minutes. The massage is delivered in 6 cycles of 10 minutes each.

89

Electric parking brake

It combines the functions of automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic release when moving off.

The driver can intervene at any time to apply or release the parking brake, by operating the control lever.

Electric leg rest

It provides additional comfort for the front passenger.

90

141

9

10

Familiarisation

Interior

1.

Bonnet release lever.

2.

Fusebox.

3.

Steering wheel adjustment controls.

4.

Door mirror controls.

Electric window controls.

5.

Side adjustable air vents.

Side window demisting vents.

6.

Quarter light demisting windows.

7.

Driver's

Horn.

8.

Courtesy lamp and map reading lamps.

9.

Panoramic

10.

CITROËN Localised Emergency Call -

CITROËN Localised Assistance Call

(depending on country of sale).

11.

Windscreen demisting/defrosting vent.

12.

Scented air freshener.

13.

Central adjustable air vents.

14.

Passenger's airbag.

15.

Glove box.

16.

Central storage.

Audio sockets, 12V accessory socket

(120 W max), 230V socket (120 W max).

17.

Storage below steering wheel (handbook pack).

18.

Gear lever (manual gearbox).

19.

Console (fixed/removable).

20.

Storage or rear multi-media.

Rear 12 V accessory socket (120 W max.).

Instruments and controls

1.

Headlamp

2.

Deactivation of volumetric alarm monitoring, or

Ticket holder.

3.

Lighting and direction indicator stalk

4.

Steering mounted controls (6-speed electronic gearbox system/automatic gearbox).

5.

Speed limiter / cruise control / active cruise control controls.

6.

Other steering mounted controls

(depending on equipment).

7.

Audio

(depending on equipment) steering mounted controls.

8.

Gear selector lever (electronic gearbox system/automatic gearbox).

9.

START/STOP button (engine starting).

10.

Wiper / screenwash / trip computer stalk.

11.

Electronic key reader.

12.

Instrument panel.

13.

Hazard warning lamps.

14.

Touch screen tablet controls.

15.

Deactivation of the DSC system.

16.

Electric parking brake control.

17.

Central locking control.

Familiarisation

.

11

12

Familiarisation

Sitting comfortably

Driver's seat

Manual adjustments

1.

Adjustment of the backrest angle of the driver's seat.

2.

Adjustment of the cushion height of the driver's seat.

3.

Forwards-backwards adjustment.

84

Electric adjustments

1.

Adjustment of the cushion angle and height, and forwards-backwards position.

2.

Adjustment of the backrest angle.

86

Other functions...

Lumbar adjustment.

Massage function.

Heated seats.

Familiarisation

.

Sitting comfortably

Head restraint adjustment Steering wheel adjustment Correct driving position

To raise it, pull it upwards.

To lower it, press on the lug A and on the head restraint at the same time.

To incline it, move the bottom forwards or backwards.

88

1.

Release.

2.

Adjust for height and reach.

3.

Lock.

As a safety precaution, these operations must only be carried out when stationary.

103

Before taking to the road, adjust in the following order:

- the position of the driver's seat

(longitudinal, height),

- the height of the driver's head restraint,

Once these adjustments have been made, check that you can see the instrument panel clearly from your driving position.

13

Familiarisation

Sitting comfortably

Door mirrors Rear view mirror

14

Adjustment

A.

Selection of the mirror to adjust.

B.

Adjustment of the mirror position in four directions.

C.

De-selection of the mirror.

101

Other functions available...

Folding / Unfolding.

Automatic dipping of the mirror in reverse for parking.

Blind spot monitoring.

Manual day/night model

1.

Selection of the "day" position of the mirror.

2.

Adjustment of the mirror.

Automatic day/night model

A.

Brightness detection in automatic day/night mode.

B.

Adjustment

102

Sitting comfortably

Front seat belts Centre rear seat belt in the

2

nd

row (fastening)

Outer rear seat belts

(stowing)

Familiarisation

.

Pull the webbing and insert the tongue A in the right hand buckle.

Insert tongue B in the left hand buckle.

Guide the belt in and place the tongue on the magnet of the outer anchorage.

231, 232

1.

Fastening the buckle.

2.

Height adjustment

Squeeze the control to slide it.

230, 231

15

Familiarisation

Seeing clearly

Lighting Wipers

16

Ring A

Lighting off/daytime running lamps.

Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Sidelamps.

Dipped / main beam headlamps.

203

Ring B

Rear foglamps only.

Front and rear foglamps.

204

Stalk A: windscreen wipers

2.

Fast

1.

Normal wipe.

Int.

0.

Intermittent wipe.

Off.

AUTO Automatic wiping.

Single wipe: pull the stalk briefly towards you.

214

Switching on "AUTO"

Press the stalk downwards.

Switching off "AUTO"

Press the stalk downwards again or place the stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2).

217

Ring B: rear wiper

Park.

Intermittent wipe.

Wash-wipe.

215

Passenger safety

Passenger's front airbag Seat belt warning lamps Manual child lock

Familiarisation

.

1.

Insert the key (integral to the electronic key).

2.

Select the position:

"OFF" (deactivation), with "rear facing" child seat,

"ON" (activation), with front passenger or

"forwards facing" child seat.

3.

Remove the key keeping the switch in the new position.

236

A.

Warning lamp for not fastened (front seat belts) and unfastened (all seat belts).

B.

Seat belt location indicator.

233

This manual device prevents opening of the rear doors by the interior door handles.

The control is located on the edge of each rear door.

259

17

18

Familiarisation

Driving safely

Operation

Use the buttons arranged on each side of the touch screen tablet for access to the menus, then press on the virtual buttons in the touch screen tablet.

From the primary page, use this button for access to the secondary page.

Use this button to return to the primary page.

Use this button for access to additional information and to the settings for certain functions.

Use this button to confirm.

Touch screen tablet menus

" Air conditioning ".

" Driving assistance ".

" Media ".

Use this button to quit.

" Navigation ".

26

" Configuration ".

" ".

" Telephone ".

Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen tablet.

Do not touch the screen with wet hands.

Use a clean soft cloth to clean the touch screen tablet.

Familiarisation

.

Driving safely

Starting the engine Switching off the engine

With the electronic key

Immobilise the vehicle. the N for vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.

Press the "START/STOP" button briefly.

The engine stops and the steering column locks.

Remove the electronic key from the reader.

With the electronic key

Place the gear selector lever at for vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.

Insert the electronic key in the reader.

Press the brake pedal on vehicles with electronic gearbox or depress the clutch pedal fully on vehicles with manual gearbox.


The steering column unlocks and the engine starts.

With the Keyless Entry and

Starting system

Place the gear selector lever at N for vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox

With the electronic key inside the vehicle

(it is not necessary to place it in the reader), press the brake pedal on vehicles with electronic gearbox or depress the clutch pedal fully on vehicles with manual gearbox.


The steering column unlocks and the engine starts.

136

With the Keyless Entry and

Starting system

Immobilise the vehicle. the N for vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.

With the electronic key inside the vehicle, press the "START/STOP" button.


135 137

Maintain pressure on the brake pedal until the engine starts.

138

19

Familiarisation

Driving safely


20

Manual application / release

Manual application of the parking brake is possible by briefly pulling the control lever.

With the ignition on or the engine running, press the brake pedal and while maintaining this pressure, briefly push the control lever to release the parking brake.

Automatic application / release

First ensure that the engine is running and the driver's door is properly closed.

The parking brake is released automatically and progressively with the movement of the vehicle.

With the vehicle at rest, the parking brake is applied automatically on switching off the ignition by pressing the START/STOP button.

If this warning lamp is on in the instrument panel, the automatic application / release is deactivated ; apply and release the parking brake manually.

141

Before leaving the vehicle, check that the brake warning lamp in the instrument panel and the P warning lamp in the control lever are on fixed (not flashing) .

Driving safely

6-speed electronic gearbox system

Gear selector positions

R Reverse.

N Neutral.

A Automated mode.

M Manual mode

Using the steering-mounted control paddles " A " and " B ":

- changing gear in manual mode,

- temporarily taking control in automated mode.

Starting

Check that the gear selector is in position N .

Press firmly on the brake pedal and press the "START/STOP" button.

150

Automatic gearbox

Familiarisation

.

Gear selector positions

P Park.

R Reverse.

N Neutral.

D Automatic mode.

M Manual mode.

Using the steering-mounted control paddles " A " and " B ":

- changing gear in manual mode,

- temporarily taking control in automatic mode.

Starting

Check that the gear selector is in position or N . the "START/STOP" button".

To come out of position P , press the brake pedal before moving the gear selector.

154

21

22

Familiarisation

Driving safely

Stop & Start

Going into engine STOP mode

The " ECO " warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine automatically goes into standby:

with a manual gearbox , at speeds below

12 mph (20 km/h), when you put the selector lever into neutral, and you release the clutch pedal,

- with a 6-speed electronic gearbox , at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press the brake pedal or when you put the selector lever in position N .

with an automatic gearbox , with the vehicle stationary, when you press the brake pedal or when you put the selector lever in position N .

Going into engine START mode

The " ECO " warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically:

with a manual gearbox , when you fully depress the clutch pedal,

with a 6-speed electronic gearbox :

● selector lever in position A or M , when you release the brake pedal,

● or selector lever in position N and brake pedal released, when you change to position A or M ,

● or when you engage reverse.

with an automatic gearbox :

● selector lever in position D or M , when you release the brake pedal,

● or selector lever in position N and brake pedal released, when you change to position or M ,


In some circumstances, STOP mode may not be available; the " ECO " warning lamp flashes for few seconds, then goes off.

160

161

Familiarisation

.

Driving safely

Steering wheel with integrated controls

Controls for speed limiter / cruise control / active cruise control

168, 171, 174

Other controls

1.

Black panel (black screen).

56

2.

Control of the display mode of the type 2 instrument screen.

35, 37

3.

Courtesy lamp on / off.

219 or

Park Assist

194

Audio system controls

or

Audio system and telephone controls

341

Audio system, navigation and telephone controls

341

23

24

Familiarisation

Eco-driving

Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO

2

emissions.

Optimise the use of your gearbox

With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting.

During acceleration change up early.

With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.

The gear shift indicator invites you to change up: as soon as the indication to change up is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it straight away.

With an electronic or automatic gearbox, this indicator appears only in manual mode.

Drive smoothly

Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO

2 emissions and also helps reduce the background traffic noise.

Control the use of your electrical equipment

Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning.

Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open.

Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window blinds...).

Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic digital regulation, as soon as the desired temperature is attained.

Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic.

Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.

Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light does not require their use.

Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.

If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.

As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices

(film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel.

Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.

Familiarisation

.

Limit the causes of excess consumption

Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats.

Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference.

Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.

Observe the recommendations on maintenance

Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in the door aperture, driver's side.

Carry out this check in particular:

- before a long journey,

- at each change of season,

- after a long period out of use.

Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.

At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.

Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended by the manufacturer.

When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any overflow.

At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles

(3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.

25

26

Monitoring

7-inch touch screen tablet

The 7-inch touch screen tablet gives access to:

General operation

- menus for adjusting settings for vehicle functions and systems,

- audio and display configuration menus,

- audio system and telephone controls and the display of associated information, and, depending on equipment, allows: visual parking sensors information,

- access to the controls for the navigation system and Internet services, and the display of associated information.

Recommendations

It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for

"flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving the map...).

A light wipe is not enough.

The tablet does not recognise pressing with more than one finger.

This technology allows use at all temperatures and when wearing gloves.

Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen tablet.

Do not touch the tablet screen with wet hands.

Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the tablet touch screen.

Principles

Use the buttons on either side of the screen for access to the menus, then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen.

Each menu is displayed over one or two pages

(primary page and secondary page).

Use this button to go to the secondary page.

For reasons of safety, the driver should only carry out operations that require close attention, with the vehicle stationary.

Some functions are not accessible when driving.

Use this button to return to the primary page.

After a few moments with no action on the secondary page, the primary page is displayed automatically.

Use this button for access to additional information and to the settings for certain functions.

Use this button to confirm.

Use this button to quit.

Monitoring

1

State of indicator lamps

Some buttons contain an indicator lamp that gives the state of the corresponding function.

Green indicator: you have switched on the corresponding function.

Orange indicator: you have switched off the corresponding function.

Touch screen tablet menus

1.

Access the the " Air conditioning " menu.

Allows adjustment of the various settings for temperature, air flow... See the sections on "Heating", "Manual air conditioning" and

"Digital air conditioning".

2.

Access to the " Driving assistance " menu.

Allows certain functions to be switched on and off and their settings adjusted.

3.

Access to the " Media " menu.

See the Audio and telematics section.

4.

Access to the " Navigation * " menu.


5.

Access to the " Configuration " menu system.

6.

Access to the " Connected services *" menu.


7.

Access to the " Telephone " menu.


8.

Adjustment of volume / mute.


* Depending on equipment.

27

28

Monitoring

"Driving assistance" menu

The functions with settings that can be adjusted are detailed in the table below.

Button Corresponding function

Speed settings

Comments

Memorisation of speeds for use with the speed limiter or cruise control.

Under-inflation initialisation

Park Assist

Stop & Start


360 vision

Reinitialisation of the under-inflation system.

Activation of the Park Assist function.

Deactivation of the function.

Activation of the function.

Activation of the function then choice of options.


Vehicle settings

Monitoring

1

Comments

Access to other functions with settings that can be adjusted. The functions are grouped together under three tabs:

- " "

● "Automatic rear wiper in reverse" (Activation of rear wiper linked to reverse gear; see the "Visibility" section),

● "Auto mirror dipping in reverse" (automatic dipping of door mirrors in reverse; see the

"Comfort" section).

" Lighting "

● "Guide-me-home lighting" (Automatic guide-me-home lighting; see the "Visibility" section),

● "Welcome lighting" (Exterior welcome lighting; see the "Visibility" section),

● "Adaptive lighting" (Cornering lighting / Directional lighting; see the "Visibility" section),

● "Mood lighting" (mood lighting; see the "Visibility" section).

- " "

● "Tailgate motorisation" (Automatic operation of the tailgate; see the Access section),

● "Driver plip action" (Selective unlocking of the driver's door; see the Access section).

29

30

Monitoring


Diagnostic

Comments

List of current alerts.

Lane departure warning system Activation of the function.

Parking sensors

Inter-vehicle time

Automatic headlamp dipping

Deactivation of the function.



"Con

fi

guration" menu

The functions available through this menu are detailed in the table below.


Audio settings

Comments

Adjustment of volume, balance...

Colour schemes Choice of a colour scheme.

Interactive help

Turn off screen

Brightness

Simplified instructions.

Turns the screen off.

Adjustment of brightness.

Monitoring

1

31

32

Monitoring


System settings

Time/Date

Languages

Screen settings

Calculator

Calendar

Comments

Choice of units:

- distance and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l).

Setting the date and time.

Choice of language used (for the touch screen tablet and the type 2 instrument panel):

French, English, Italian, Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Turkish, Russian.

Adjustment of the display settings (scrolling of text, animations...)

Displays the calculator.

Displays the calendar.

Type 1 instrument panel

Monitoring

1

Dials and screens

graduation according to engine (petrol or

Diesel).

2.

Gear shift indicator, selector position and gear for an electronic or automatic gearbox.

3.

Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).

4.

Cruise control or speed limiter settings.

5.

Fuel gauge.

6.

Service indicator, then total mileage recorder (miles or km).

These functions are displayed in turn when the ignition is switched on.

7.

Trip

8.

Repeat of air conditioning information.

Control buttons

A.

Main lighting dimmer buttons.

B.

Recall indicator or trip recorder).

33

Monitoring


This instrument panel is presented in the form of a 12-inch panoramic HD screen.

It can be personalised. Depending on the display mode selected, some information can be hidden (see "Personalisation of the instrument panel").

34

Dials and screens

1.

Rev (x 1000 tr/min or rpm)

("DIALS" mode).

2.

Gear shift indicator, position of the selector lever and the gear on an electronic or automatic gearbox.

3.

Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).

4.

Cruise control or speed limiter setting.

5.

Fuel gauge.

6.

Total

7.

Trip distance recorder (miles or km).

8.

Repeat

9.

Repeat of the current media or telephone information.

10.

Repeat of the navigation information.

Control button

A.

Recall servicing information. indicator or trip recorder).

Monitoring

1

Display zones Personalisation of the type 2 instrument panel

instrument panel, by choosing:

Choosing the display mode

Each mode corresponds to the type of information displayed in the configurable area.

Whatever the display mode or colour scheme chosen, the instrument panel contains

- a A with:

● the speedometer,

● the warning lamps,

● the fuel gauge,

● the various repeated information and alert messages.

- a B .

Most of the warning lamps do not have a fixed position.

The warning and indicator lamps in the left hand column are displayed from top to bottom in order of importance.

For certain functions that have indicator lamps for both on and off, there is just one dedicated location.

Choosing a colour scheme

It depends on the colour scheme chosen for the touch screen tablet. To modify it with the vehicle stationary:

select the " Configuration " menu of the touch screen tablet,

press the " Color schemes " button,

choose a colour scheme,

confirm.

The system restarts to take account of the modifications to the touch screen tablet and the instrument panel.

trip computer, rev counter and coolant temperature indicator.

35

Monitoring

36 the media being played or the radio.

- "NAVIGATION": display of information related to the navigation in progress (map and instructions).

- "PHOTOS": display of the photo selected in the "Media" menu of the touch screen tablet.

Monitoring

1

- "DRIVING": used for the display of the inter-vehicle time and information related to the active cruise control.

The recommended speed is displayed in the central part.

The driver remains responsible for observing the driving regulations.

To modify the display mode of the instrument panel:

turn the wheel on the left of the steering wheel to display and run through the different modes in the right hand part of the instrument panel, in the central window, press the wheel to confirm your choice.

The new mode is applied immediately.

37

38

Monitoring

Indicator and warning lamps

Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in operation, switched off or has a fault.

Associated warnings

The switching on of certain warning lamps may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

The warning lamps may come on continuously

(fixed) or flash.

When the ignition is switched on

Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds in the instrument panel when the vehicle's ignition is switched on.

When the engine is started, these same warning lamps should go off.

If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information on the warning lamp concerned.

Certain warning lamps may come on in one of two modes: fixed (continuous) or flashing.

Only by relating the type of illumination to the operation of the vehicle can it be determined whether the situation is normal or a fault has occurred. In the event of a fault, the illumination of the warning lamp may be accompanied by a message.

Refer to the tables on the following pages for more information.

The position of the warning lamps in the type 2 instrument panel depends on the colour scheme selected.

Monitoring

Operation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on in the instrument panel, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.

Warning / indicator lamp State

Left-hand direction indicator

flashing with buzzer.

Right-hand direction indicator

flashing with buzzer.

Sidelamps

Cause

The lighting stalk is pushed down.

The lighting stalk is pushed up.

Action / Observations

Dipped beam headlamps

Main beam headlamps

fixed.

"Sidelamps" position.

The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped beam headlamps" position.

you.

Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.

1

39

40

Monitoring


Automatic headlamp dipping fixed.

Front foglamps

Rear foglamps fixed.

fixed.

fixed.

Cause

The lighting control stalk is in the

"AUTO" position, pulled towards you, and the function is activated

(" Driving assistance " menu).

The system is in dipped beam mode as there is sufficient ambient light and/or the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of main beam.


The camera, located in the door mirror, manages the operation of main beam, depending on the ambient lighting and driving conditions.

Pulling the lighting stalk again to deactivate.

For more information on this function, refer to the

Visibility section.

The lighting control stalk is in the

"AUTO" position, pulled towards you, and the function is activated

(" Driving assistance " menu).

The system is in main beam mode as the ambient lighting and traffic conditions allow it.

The front foglamps are switched on.

Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice to switch off the front foglamps.

The rear foglamps are switched on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off the rear foglamps.

For more information on the lighting controls, refer to the corresponding section.

Monitoring


Diesel engine pre-heating

Cause

fixed. The " START/STOP " switch has been pressed (ignition on).


Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting.

Once it goes off, starting is immediate, on condition that you maintain pressure on the brake pedal for an electronic or automatic gearbox, or the clutch pedal is pressed fully down for a manual gearbox.

The period of illumination of the warning lamp is determined by the ambient conditions (up to about thirty seconds in extreme conditions).

If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again, then start the engine.

1


fixed. The electric parking brake is applied.

Release the electric parking brake to switch off the warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, briefly push the electric parking brake control lever.

Observe the safety recommendations.

For more information on the electric parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.


Park Assist

fixed. The blind spot monitoring function has been activated.

fixed. The Park Assist function has been activated.

For more information, refer to the corresponding section.

For more information, refer to the corresponding section.

41

42

Monitoring


Automatic wiping fixed.

Cause

The wiper control is pushed downwards.


Automatic front wiping is activated.

To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.

Passenger airbag system

Stop & Start fixed.

fixed.

flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

The control switch, located at the passenger's end of the dashboard, is in the "ON" position.

The passenger's front airbag is activated.

In this case, do not install a rearwards-facing child seat on the front passenger seat.

When the vehicle stops (red lights, traffic jams, ...) the Stop & Start system has put the engine into STOP mode.

Turn the control switch to the "OFF" position to deactivate the front passenger's airbag.

In this case you can install a rearwards-facing child seat.

The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to move off.

STOP mode is temporarily unavailable. or

START mode is invoked automatically.

For more information on special cases with STOP mode and START mode, refer to the "Stop & Start" section.

Monitoring

Deactivation indicator lamps

If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.

This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message.


Passenger's airbag system

fixed.

Dynamic stability control

(DSC/ASR )

fixed.

Cause Action / Observations

The control switch, located at the right hand end of the dashboard is set to the OFF position.

The passenger's front airbag is deactivated.

Set the control to the "ON" position to activate the passenger's front airbag.

In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rearwardfacing position.

The button, located on the centre console, is pressed. Its indicator lamp is on.

The DSC/ASR is deactivated.

DSC: dynamic stability control.

ASR: anti-slip regulation.

Press the button to activate the DSC/ASR. Its indicator lamp goes off.

The DSC/ASR system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started.

If deactivated, the system is reactivated automatically from around 30 mph (50 km/h).

1

Stop & Start fixed. The Stop & Start has been deactivated.

Reactivate the function via the " Driving assistance " menu.

43

44

Monitoring

Warning lamps

When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action on the part of the driver.

Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further using the associated message.

If you encounter any problems, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.


STOP fixed, associated with another warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

Cause

Illumination of this warning lamp is related to a serious fault detected with the braking or power steering systems, the electrical system, or with engine lubrication or cooling or a puncture.


Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as the engine may cut out.

Park, switch off the ignition and call a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Service

State

on temporarily.

fixed.

Monitoring

Cause

A minor fault has occurred for which there is no specific warning lamp.


Identify the fault by means of the associated message, such as:

- opening of a door, the boot or bonnet,

- low engine oil level,

- low screenwash/headlamp wash fluid level,

- discharged remote control battery,

1

Diesel vehicles.

For more information on the PEF, refer to the

"Checks - particle emissions filter" section.

For any other faults, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

A major fault has occurred for which there is no specific warning lamp.

Identify the fault by reading the message and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

45

46

Monitoring


Electric parking brake flashing.

Electric parking brake fault fixed.

Deactivation of the automatic functions of the electric parking brake fixed.

Cause

When driving: the electric parking brake is not fully released.


Fully release the parking brake by a quick press on the control lever. If the warning persist, stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

When stationary: parking brake applied, the system does guarantee immobilisation of the vehicle (when parking on a very steep slope, for example).

Secure the immobilisation of the vehicle by engaging a gear with a manual or electronic gearbox, by placing the gear selector in position P with an automatic gearbox, or by fitting a chock to one of the wheels.

The electric parking brake has a fault. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

The parking brake can be released manually.


The "automatic application" (on switching off the engine) and

"automatic release" functions are deactivated or faulty.

In the event of a fault, illumination of this warning lamp is accompanied by a message.

To reactivate the automatic functions, refer to the

"Electric parking brake" section.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop if automatic application / release is not possible.

The parking brake can be released manually.


Monitoring

Warning / indicator lamp

+

Braking

State Cause dropped significantly.


You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Top up with brake fluid listed by CITROËN.

If the problem persists, have the system checked by a

CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

fixed, associated with the ABS warning lamp.

The electronic brake force distribution

(EBFD) system has a fault.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Anti-lock

Braking System

(ABS)

fixed.


(DSC/ASR)

Engine autodiagnosis system

flashing.

fixed.

flashing.

fixed.

The anti-lock braking system has a fault.

The DSC/ASR regulation is operating.

The vehicle retains conventional braking.

Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a

CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

The system optimises traction and improves the directional stability of the vehicle.

Unless it has been deactivated

(button pressed and its indicator lamp on) the DSC/ASR system has a fault.

Have it checked by a CITROËN or a qualified workshop.

The engine management system has a fault.

Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.


The emission control system has a fault.

The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.

If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop without delay.

1

47

48

Monitoring


Low fuel level fixed, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

Cause

When it first comes on there remains approximately 6 litres of fuel in the tank.

You are then using the fuel reserve.


You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel.

Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is switched on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

This audible signal and message are repeated with increasing frequency as the drops towards "0".

Fuel tank capacity: approximately 57 litres (petrol) or

55 litres (Diesel).

Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.

Seat belt(s) not fastened / unfastened

Airbags fixed or flashing accompanied by an audible signal. on temporarily.

Passenger airbag system fixed.

flashing.

A seat belt has not been fastened or has been unfastened.

Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.

This lamp comes on for a few seconds when you turn on the ignition, then goes off.

One of the airbag or seat belt pretensioner systems has a fault.

This lamp should go off when the engine is started.

If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.


The passenger airbag system has a fault.

Do not have a passenger seated in the front passenger seat


Monitoring


Directional headlamps

flashing.

Door(s) open *

Cause

The directional headlamps system has a fault.

fixed, associated with a message identifying the door, if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).

A door or the boot is still open.

Battery charge

Maximum coolant temperature



Close the door or boot.

fixed, associated with a message identifying the door, and accompanied by an audible signal if the speed is above

6 mph (10 km/h).

fixed. The battery charging circuit has a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, ...).

The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.

If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

fixed red.

The temperature of the cooling system is too high.

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping up the level, if necessary.

If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop.

Engine oil pressure

fixed. There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.

You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.

Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

* Only with the type 1 instrument panel.

1

49

50

Monitoring

Warning / indicator lamp

+

Under-inflation

State fixed.

Cause

The pressure in one or more wheels is too low.


Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.

This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold.

You must reinitialise the system after the adjustment of one or more tyre pressures and after changing one or more wheels.

flashing then fixed, accompanied by the

Service warning lamp.

The system has fault: the tyre pressures are no longer monitored.

Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.

Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Foot on the brake pedal *

Foot on the clutch* fixed.

flashing.

fixed.

The brake pedal is not pressed.

With an electronic gearbox, press the brake pedal to start the engine (lever in position N ).

If you wish to release the parking brake without pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain on.

With an automatic gearbox, press the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of position P .

With an electronic gearbox, if you hold the vehicle on an incline using the accelerator for too long, the clutch overheats.

Use the brake pedal and/or the parking brake.

In the STOP mode of Stop & Start, changing to START mode is refused because the clutch pedal is not fully down.

You must declutch fully to allow the change to engine

START mode.

* Only with the type 1 instrument panel

Service indicator

System which informs the driver when the next service is due, in accordance with the manufacturer's servicing schedule.

The point at which the service is due is calculated from the last indicator zero reset. It is determined by two parameters:

- the distance travelled,

- the time elapsed since the last service.

Monitoring

1

Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner symbolising the service operations comes on. The distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due.

Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before the next service is due.

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:

Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due

Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before the next service is due.


5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation.

The spanner remains on to indicate that a service must be carried out soon.

5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner goes off f ; the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The screen then indicates the total and trip distances.

More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due

When the ignition is switched on, no service information appears in the screen.

51

Monitoring

52

Service overdue

For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner flashes to indicate that the service must be carried out as soon as possible.

Example: the service is overdue by 186 miles

(300 km).


5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on .

The distance remaining may be weighted by the time factor, depending on the driving conditions.

Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the period since the last service, indicated in the servicing and warranty booklet .

Service indicator zero reset

After each service, the service indicator must be reset to zero.

The procedure for resetting to zero is as follows:

switch off the ignition,

press and hold the trip distance recorder zero reset button,

switch on the ignition; the distance recorder display begins a countdown,

when the display indicates "=0" , release the button; the spanner disappears.

Following this operation, if you wish to disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle and wait at least five minutes for the zero reset to be taken into account.

Retrieving the service information

You can access the service information at any time.

Press the trip distance recorder zero reset button.

The service information is displayed for a few seconds, then disappears.

Monitoring

1

Engine oil level indicator

System which informs the driver whether the engine oil level is correct or not.

This information is indicated for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, after the service information.

Oil level correct

This is indicated by a message in the instrument panel. The level read will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than

30 minutes.

Oil level incorrect

This is indicated by a message in the instrument panel.

If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid damage to the engine.

Oil level indicator fault

This is indicated by a message in the instrument panel. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Dipstick

Refer to the "Checks" section to locate the dipstick and the oil filler cap on your engine.

There are 2 marks on the dipstick:

A = max; never exceed this level,

B = min; top up the level via the oil filler, using the grade of oil suited to your engine.

53

54

Monitoring

Distance recorders

The total and trip distances are displayed for thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, when the driver's door is opened and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

To conform to legislation in the country you are crossing, change the units of distance (miles or km) via the configuration menu.

Total distance recorder

System which measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle since its first registration.

Trip distance recorder

System which measures a distance travelled during a day or other period since it was reset to zero by the driver.

With the ignition on, press the button until zeros appear.

Allows the manual adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel and touch screen tablet to suit the ambient light level.

Operates only when the vehicle lighting is on, with the exception of the daytime running lamps.

Two buttons

With the headlamps on, press button to increase the brightness of the instruments and controls and the interior mood lighting or button to reduce it.

As soon as the lighting reaches the required level of brightness, release the button.

Touch screen tablet

Press on the "Configuration" menu.

Adjust the brightness by pressing on the " + " or " " buttons.

Monitoring

1

55

56

Monitoring

Black screen (black panel)

instrument panel to be switched off for night driving.

The instrument panel remains on with the vehicle speed, the gear selected in an electronic or automatic gearbox, cruise control or speed limiter information, if in use, and the low fuel alerts as appropriate.

If there is an alert or a change in a function or to a setting, the black panel mode is interrupted.

Black screen (touch screen tablet)

Using the steering mounted control:

With the vehicle lighting on, press this button again to activate the black panel.

Press this button again to deactivate it.

Press on the " Configuration " menu.

Press the " Turn off screen " button. The screen in the touch screen tablet goes off.

Press the screen again (anywhere on its surface) to switch it on again.

Setting the date and time

Select the " Configuration " menu.

From the secondary page, select

" Time/Date ".

Select " Adjust time " or " Adjust date " and modify the settings using the number pad, then confirm.

Press " Confirm " to quit.

Monitoring

1

57

58

Monitoring

Trip computer


System that gives you information on the journey in progress (range, fuel consumption…).

The information is accessible in the " Driving assistance " menu.

Information display in the touch screen tablet

- The current fuel consumption tab with:

● the range,

● the current fuel consumption,

● the Stop & Start time counter.

Trip reset

Permanent display:

Select the " Driving assistance " menu.

The trip computer information is displayed in the primary page of the menu.

Press one of the buttons to display the desired tab.

Temporary display in a new window:

Press the end of the wiper control stalk for access to the information and display the different tabs.

- The "1" tab with:

● the distance travelled.

● the average fuel consumption,

● the average speed, for the first trip.

- The trip "2" tab with:

● the distance travelled.


● the average speed, for the second trip.

When the desired trip is displayed, press the reset button or on the end of the wiper control stalk.

Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical.

For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.

Trip computer


Information display in the instrument panel

The display of trip computer information is permanent when you select the "DIALS" display mode.

Trip reset

Monitoring

1

For all other display modes, pressing the end of the wiper stalk displays this information in a new window. control stalk to display the various tabs in succession.

- The current information tab with:

● the range,

● the current fuel consumption,

● the Stop & Start time counter.

- Trip with:

● the average speed.


● the distance travelled,

for the first trip.

- Trip "2" with:

● the average speed,


● the distance travelled,

for the second trip.

When the trip required is displayed, press the control for more than two seconds or use the left hand thumb wheel of the steering mounted controls.

Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical.

For example, trip can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.

59

60

Monitoring

Trip computer, a few definitions

Range

(miles or km)

The distance which can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank (related to the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled).

Current fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)

Calculated over the last few seconds.

This function is only displayed from

20 mph (30 km/h).

This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the relief, resulting in a significant change in the current fuel consumption.

When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After filling with at least

5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).

If dashes are displayed continuously while driving in place of the digits, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Distance travelled

(miles or km)

Calculated since the last trip computer reset.

Average fuel consumption

(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)


Average speed

(mph or km/h)


Stop & Start time counter

(minutes / seconds or hours / minutes)

If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey.

It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the START/STOP button.

Access

Electronic key

Remote control

Unlocking the vehicle

Complete unlocking

Press this button.

Selective unlocking

To unlock only the driver's door, press this button once. System which permits remote locking or unlocking of the vehicle as well as opening the boot and, depending on version, operation of the alarm.

It also allows the location and starting of the vehicle as well as providing protection against theft.

The electronic key includes an integral back-up emergency key.

To unlock the other doors and the boot, press this button again.

The setting of the selective unlocking is done in the " Driving assistance " menu, then " Vehicle settings ".

Complete unlocking is activated by default.

Unlocking the vehicle and opening the boot

Make a long press on this button to unlock the vehicle and, depending on version, release the tailgate or open the motorised tailgate.

Settings for the motorised tailgate can be adjusted in the " Driving assistance " menu, then " ".

Motorised operation is activated by default.

The direction indicators flash for a few seconds. The door mirror spot lamps come on. Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold, the welcome lighting comes on, the alarm is deactivated.

2

61

62

Access

Locking the vehicle

Normal locking

Press this button.

Holding the button allows the windows to be raised to the desired position.

Ensure that nothing could prevent the correct closing of the windows.

Be aware of children when operating the windows.

The direction indicators come on for a few seconds.

Depending on your version, the door mirrors fold, the alarm is activated.

If a door or the boot is not properly closed, locking does not take place.

Nevertheless, the alarm (if fitted) will be fully activated after around 45 seconds.

If the vehicle is unlocked by mistake and no action is taken on the doors or boot, the vehicle will lock itself again automatically after about thirty seconds. if the alarm had already been activated, it will not be reactivated automatically.

The automatic folding and unfolding of the door mirrors can be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Deadlocking

Deadlocking renders the interior door controls inoperative.

It also deactivates the manual central locking button.

Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

Locating your vehicle

This function allows you to identify your vehicle from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your vehicle must be locked.

Press this button.

This will switch on the courtesy lamps and the direction indicators will flash for about

10 seconds.

With the vehicle unlocked, press this button.

Within five seconds, press this button again to deadlock the vehicle.

Access

2

63

64

Access

"Keyless Entry and Starting" system

Unlocking the vehicle

System that allows the opening, closing and starting of the vehicle while keeping the electronic key on your person.

The electronic key can also be used as a remote control; refer to the "Key / remote control" section.

Selective unlocking

To unlock only the drivers door, with the electronic key on your person, pass your hand behind the driver's door handle. Pull the door handle to open.

To unlock the complete vehicle, pass your hand behind one of the door handle of the front passenger door with the electronic key close to the passenger door, or press the tailgate opening control with the electronic key close to the rear of the vehicle.

Complete unlocking

With the electronic key on your person and in the defined zone A , pass your hand behind the door handle of one of the front doors to unlock the vehicle or press the tailgate opening control.

Pull the door handle to open the door.

Activation or deactivation of the selective unlocking is done in the " Driving assistance " menu, then " Vehicle settings ".

By default, complete unlocking is activated.

For reasons of safety and theft protection, do not leave your electronic key in the vehicle, even when you are close to it.

It is recommended that you keep it on your person: in a pocket, bag, ...

The direction indicators flash for a few seconds.

Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold, the welcome lighting comes on, the alarm is deactivated.


Normal locking

With the electronic key in the defined zone , press with a finger or thumb on one of the door handles (at the markings) or press the locking button on the tailgate.

Maintaining pressure allows the windows to be raised to the desired position.

Ensure that nothing could prevent the correct operation of the windows.


The direction indicators come on for a few seconds.

Depending on your version, the door mirrors fold, the alarm is activated.

Access

2

65

Access

66

Deadlocking renders the interior door controls inoperative.

It also deactivates the manual central control button.

Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.

By the doors:

With the electronic key in the defined zone , press a finger or thumb on one of the front door handles (at the markings) or the locking button located on the tailgate to lock the vehicle. or the locking button located on the tailgate again to deadlock the vehicle.

If one of the doors or the boot is still open or if the electronic key for the

Keyless Entry and Starting system has been left inside the vehicle, the central locking does not take place.

However, the alarm (if present) will be fully activated after about 45 seconds.

If the vehicle is unlocked by mistake and with no action on the doors or boot, the vehicle will lock again automatically after about thirty seconds.

If the alarm had been activated previously, it will not be reactivated automatically.

The automatic folding and unfolding of the door mirrors can be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Access

As a safety measure (children on board), never leave the vehicle without taking the key for the Keyless Entry and

Starting system, even for a short period.

Be aware of the risk of theft when the key for the Keyless Entry and Starting system is in one of the defined zones with the vehicle unlocked.

In order to preserve the battery in the electronic key and the vehicle's battery, the "Hands-free" functions are put into long-term standby after 21 days without use. To restore these functions, press one of the remote control buttons or start the engine with the electronic key in the reader (see the "Starting with the Keyless Entry and Starting system" section).

2

Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt...) on the inner surface if the door handle may affect detection.

If cleaning the inner surface of the door handle using a cloth does not restore detection, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

A sudden splash of water (stream of water, high pressure jet washer, …) may be identified by the system as the desire to open the vehicle.

67

Access

Emergency procedure

Emergency unlocking/locking using the integral key

68

The integral key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle when the electronic key cannot operate and in the event of a fault with the Keyless

Entry and Starting system: or disconnected, ...

- vehicle located in an area with strong electromagnetic signals.

Unlocking

to unlock the vehicle.

Press and hold the latch 1 to extract the integral key 2 .

The integral key is also used to deactivate/ reactivate the passenger's airbag.

It provides a backup means of locking the passenger doors.

It also allows locking of the vehicle without activation of the alarm.

Depending on your version, the direction indicators flash for a few seconds, the door mirrors unfold and the welcome lighting comes on.

If the alarm was activated, the siren will sound on opening the door with the key

(in the remote control). It stops when the ignition is switched on.

Normal locking

Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle to lock the vehicle completely.

Deadlocking

Turn the key towards the rear in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely.

Turn the key towards the rear again within five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.

Depending on your version, the direction indicators flash for a few seconds, the door mirrors fold.

If your vehicle has an alarm, this function is not activated by locking with the integral key.

Access

2

69

Access

Remote control problem - reinitialisation

70

Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.

Place the mechanical key (integral with the remote control) in the lock to unlock your vehicle.

Place the electronic key in the reader.

Switch on the ignition by pressing START/

STOP.

The electronic key is fully operational again.

If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.

Changing the battery of the electronic key

Battery ref.: CR2032 / 3 volts.

A message appears in the instrument panel screen when replacement of the battery is needed.

Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver at the cutout.

Lift off the cover.

Fit the new battery into its location observing the original direction of fitment.

Clip the cover onto the casing.

Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment.

Take them to an approved collection point.

Access

Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's registration document and your personal identification documents and if possible the key code label.

The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key.

2

Electronic key

The electronic key is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.

Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your electronic key out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised.

The electronic key cannot operate as a remote control when it is in the reader or even when the ignition is switched on.


Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.

As a safety precaution (with children on board), take the electronic key with you when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.

Electrical interference

The electronic key may not operate if close to certain electronic devices: telephone, laptop computer, strong magnetic fields, ...

Anti-theft protection

Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions.

When purchasing a second-hand vehicle

Have all of the keys in your possession paired by a CITROËN dealer, to ensure that only your keys allow your vehicle to be unlocked and started.

71

72

Access

Central locking

Manual central locking

Press this button to operate the central locking of the vehicle (doors and boot) from inside the vehicle.

Pressing the button again unlocks the vehicle completely.

When locking / deadlocking from the outside

If the vehicle is locked or deadlocked from the outside, the button is not active.

After normal locking, pull one of the interior door handles to unlock the vehicle.

After deadlocking, you have to use the remote control, the Keyless Entry and Starting system or the integral key to unlock the vehicle.

Automatic central locking of doors (anti-intrusion security)

The doors and boot lock automatically when driving, as soon as the speed exceeds 6 mph

(10 km/h).

To activate or deactivate this function (activated by default): with the ignition on, press this button until a message appears in the instrument panel.

If one of the doors or the boot is open, automatic central locking does not complete: the sound of the locks rebounding can be heard.

Transporting long or voluminous objects

If you want to drive with the boot open but the vehicle's side doors locked, press the central locking control button to lock the doors.

Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.

Doors

Opening

From outside

After unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and

Starting system, pull the door handle.

From inside

door.

Access

Closing

If a door is not properly closed:

- with the engine running , this warning lamp and a message appear in the instrument panel

(type 1) for a few seconds,

when driving (speed above

6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp and a message, accompanied by an audible signal, appear in the instrument panel (type 1 and type 2) for a few seconds.

2

73

Access

Back-up control

System allowing the doors to be locked and unlocked manually in the event of a malfunction of the central locking system or battery failure.

74

Locking the driver's door

Insert the integral key in the door lock, then turn it to the rear.

You can also apply the procedure described for the passenger doors.

Unlocking the driver's door

Insert the integral key in the door lock, then turn it to the front.

Locking the front and rear passenger doors

Open the doors.

For the rear doors, check that the child lock is not on (see the "Manual child lock" section).

Insert the integral key in the latch located on the edge of the door and turn it an eighth of a turn to the right for the right hand door, and to the the left for the left hand door.

Locking is effective when the slot is horizontal.

Close the doors and check that the vehicle has locked correctly from the outside.

Unlocking the front and rear passenger doors

Pull the interior door opening control.

To ensure complete locking of the vehicle, only disconnecting the battery inhibits opening of the tailgate from the outside.

Access

Boot

Opening the tailgate

With the electronic key / remote control

Make a long press on this button to release the tailgate. If the vehicle was locked, this action first unlocks the vehicle.

Raise the tailgate.

When selective unlocking is activated, the electronic key must be close to the rear of the vehicle.

Closing the tailgate

Lower the tailgate using the interior grips.

Release the grips and press down on the outside of the tailgate to close it.

With the tailgate opening control

With the vehicle unlocked or with the electronic key of the Keyless Entry and

Starting system in the zone covered, press the tailgate control A .

If the tailgate is not properly closed:

engine running , this warning lamp and a message appear in the instrument panel (type 1) for a few seconds,

- vehicle running (speed above

6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp and a message appear in the instrument panel (type 1 and type 2) for a few seconds, accompanied by an audible signal.

2

The tailgate is not designed to take a bicycle carrier.

75

Access

Motorised tailgate

Tailgate controls

76

Check that there is enough space to allow for the movement of the tailgate.

Activation and deactivation of the motorised tailgate function is done in the " Driving assistance " menu, then " Vehicle settings ".

This function is deactivated by default.

The tailgate is not designed to support a bicycle carrier.

When installing a bicycle carrier on a towbar, it is essential to deactivate the automatic operation.

A: Exterior control

Never place a finger in the tailgate locking system: risk of a serious accident!

To avoid the risk of injury, ensure that there is no person close to the rear of the vehicle when opening and closing the motorised tailgate.

Be careful of rear passengers.

The motorised tailgate has an obstacle detection system that automatically interrupts its operation if it contacts an obstacle (the movement is reversed by a few degrees to allow the tailgate to be freed).

B: Interior control

Access

Motorised opening

Unlocking and opening the tailgate with the electronic key / remote control

Make a long press on this button.

Motorised closing

There are two possibilities: or

Press and release the exterior control A .

Press and then release button B .

Unlocking and opening the tailgate with the Keyless Entry and Starting system

Press button A on the tailgate, with the electronic key in the area of coverage.

The motorised tailgate has an antipinch system that interrupts closing if it encounters an obstacle.

Memorising an opening position

Where height is restricted (garage with a low ceiling, ...) it is possible to limit and memorise the opening angle of the tailgate.

This memorisation is done as follows:

- open the tailgate to the desired position,

B or the exterior control for more than 3 seconds.

Memorisation of the maximum opening position of the tailgate is confirmed by an audible signal.

2

When selective locking is activated, the electronic key must be near the rear of the vehicle.

Opening the tailgate

After complete unlocking of the vehicle, press control A on the tailgate.

The instruction is confirmed by an audible signal.

By default, the tailgate opens completely or alternatively to the memorised position.

Operation of the tailgate can be interrupted at any time:

- by pressing one of these two buttons, or

- by pressing the exterior control A .

After interruption of an operation, another press on one of the controls resumes the movement, with the exception of a press on the remote control button, which only allows opening.

To cancel the memorised position: button A for more than 3 seconds.

77

78

Access

The motorised tailgate can be opened and closed manually, even if motorisation is activated.

When opening and closing a motorised tailgate manually, there is no assistance from gas-filled struts. Resistance to opening and closing is therefore entirely normal.

Reinitialising the tailgate

This operation is necessary where there is no movement - after detection of an obstacle, after connecting or recharging the battery, ...

Open the tailgate by hand, if necessary.

Manually close the tailgate fully.

If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Precautions in use

In the event of an accumulation of snow on the tailgate, clear the snow before commanding an automatic opening of the tailgate.

The formation of ice can block the tailgate and prevent its opening: wait until the ice melts with the heating of the passenger compartment.

When washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, don't forget to lock your vehicle to avoid the risk of unexpected opening.

Repeated opening and closing of the tailgate can cause overheating of its electric motor, after which opening and closing will not be possible.

Allow 10 minutes for the motor to cool down before operating the tailgate again.

Tailgate release

System allowing the mechanical unlocking of the boot in the event of a battery or central locking system malfunction.

Unlocking

Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.

Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate.

Move the latch to the left.

Locking after closing

If the fault persists after closing again, the boot will remain locked.

Access

Alarm

System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. It provides the following types of monitoring:

Self-protection function

Locking the vehicle with full alarm system

The system checks for the disconnection of any of its components.

The alarm is triggered if the battery, the button or the wires of the siren are disconnected or damaged.

Activation

Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.

Lock the vehicle using the remote control.

For all work on the alarm system, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

or

Lock the vehicle using the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.

The system checks for opening of the vehicle.

The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a door, the boot or the bonnet...

- Interior volumetric

The system checks for any variation in the volume in the passenger compartment.

The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window, enters the passenger compartment or moves inside the vehicle.

The monitoring system is active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second and the the direction indicators come on for about

2 seconds.

After an instruction to lock the vehicle locked using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system, the exterior perimeter monitoring is activated after a delay of

5 seconds, the interior volumetric monitoring after 45 seconds.

If an opening (door, boot, bonnet...) is not closed fully, the vehicle is not locked but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be activated after a delay of 45 seconds, at the same time as the interior volumetric monitoring.

2

79

80

Access

Deactivation

Press one of the unlocking buttons on the remote control:

short press

long press or

Unlock the vehicle using the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.

The monitoring system is deactivated: the indicator lamp in the button is off and the direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.

In the case of automatic locking of the vehicle (which occurs after a period of

30 seconds if a door or the boot is not opened), the monitoring system is not reactivated automatically. To reactivate it, it is necessary to unlock the vehicle and lock it again, using the remote control or the "Keyless Entry and

Starting" system.

Locking the vehicle with exterior perimeter monitoring only

Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in certain cases such as:

- leaving a window partially open,

- washing your vehicle,

- changing a wheel,

Deactivation of the volumetric monitoring

OFF

Switch of the ignition and within ten seconds press this button until its indicator lamp is on fixed.

Get out of the vehicle.

Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote control or the "Keyless Entry and

Starting" system.

Only the exterior perimeter protection system is active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second.

To be effective, this deactivation must be done every time the ignition is switched off.

Access

Reactivation of the interior volumetric monitoring

Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and

Starting system.

The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Reactivate the full alarm system by locking the vehicle using the remote control or the

"Keyless Entry and Starting" system.

The indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second again.

Triggering of the alarm

This is indicated by sounding of the siren and flashing of the direction indicators for thirty seconds.

The monitoring functions remain active until the alarm has been triggered eleven times in succession.

When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in the button informs you that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this flashing stops immediately.

Failure of the remote control

To deactivate the monitoring functions:

Unlock the vehicle using the key (integral with the remote control) in the driver's door lock.

Open the door; the alarm is triggered.

Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm

Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key

(integral with the remote control) in the driver's door lock.

Operating fault

When the ignition is switched on, fixed illumination of the indicator lamp in the button indicates a fault in the system.


Automatic activation *

2 minutes after the last door or the boot is closed, the system is activated automatically. the vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the remote control or unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Entry and Starting system.

2

* According to country.

81

82

Access

Electric windows

1. Left hand front electric window.

2. Right hand front electric window.

3. Right hand rear electric window.

4. Left hand rear electric window.

5. Deactivating the electric window switches located at the rear seats .

To open or close the window, press or pull the switch gently. The window stops as soon as the switch is released.

Automatic operation

To open or close the window, press or pull switch fully: the window opens or closes completely when the switch is released.

Pressing the switch again stops the movement of the window.

Safety anti-pinch

When the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and immediately partially lowers again.

In the event of unwanted opening of the window on closing, press the switch until the window opens completely, then pull the switch immediately until the window closes. Continue to hold the switch for approximately one second after the window has closed.

The safety anti-pinch function is not active during this operation.

The electric window switches remain operational for approximately 45 seconds after switching off the ignition.

Once this time has elapsed, the electric windows will not operate. To reactivate them, switch the ignition on again.

Access

Deactivating the rear controls for the rear windows

For the safety of your children, press switch 5 to prevent operation of the rear windows irrespective of their positions.

The warning lamp in the button comes on, accompanied by a message confirming activation. It remains on, as long as the child lock is deactivated.

Use of the rear electric windows from the driver's controls remains possible.

Reinitialisation of the electric windows

Following reconnection of the battery, the safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised.

The safety anti-pinch function is not active during these operations.

For each window:

- lower the window completely, then raise it, it will rise in steps of a few centimetres with each action. Repeat the operation until the window closes completely,

- continue pull the switch for at least one second after reaching this position, window closed.

In the event of contact during operation of the windows, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the switch concerned.

When operating the passenger electric window switches, the driver must ensure that nothing is preventing correct closing of the windows.

The driver must ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly.


Be aware of passengers or other persons present when closing the windows using the the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.

2

83

Comfort

Front seats

Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.

As a safety measure, seat adjustments should only be done when stationary.

Manual adjustments

84

Forwards-backwards

Raise the control bar and slide the seat forwards or backwards.

When the seat is in the correct position, push it forwards and backwards without raising the control bar to check that the it has latched.

Driver's seat backrest angle

Turn the knob to adjust the seat backrest.

Driver's seat height

Pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, as many times as necessary, to obtain the position required.

Comfort

3

Passenger's seat backrest angle

Pull the control upwards to adjust the backrest.

When the backrest angle is correct, release the control.

Table position for the passenger's seat backrest

Check that there is no object that could interfere with the movement of the seat, both above and below.

When the backrest is at the correct angle, release the control lever. To ensure that the backrest does not suddenly fold forwards and hurt you, restrain it with your back or your hand while operating the control.

Place the head restraint in the low position, raise the armrest and fold the fixed table onto the back of the seat.

Pull the control fully up and tip the backrest forwards.

To return to the normal position, guide the backrest backwards until it locks.

This position, associated with the position of the rear seats, allows you to carry long objects inside the vehicle.

85

Comfort

Front seats

Electric adjustments

Forwards-backwards (driver's seat)

Push the control forwards or rearwards to slide the seat.

Seat backrest angle

adjust the angle of the seat backrest.

Seat cushion height and angle

Operate the rear part of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the desired height.

Operate the front part of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the desired angle.

86

To avoid discharging the battery, carry out these adjustments with the engine running.

Comfort

Storing driving positions

System which registers the electrical settings of the driver's seat and door mirrors. It enables you to store and recall two positions using the buttons on the side of the driver's seat.

Storing a position

Using buttons M / 1 / 2

Switch on the ignition.

Adjust your seat and the door mirrors.

Press button M , then press button 1 or 2 within four seconds.

An audible signal indicates that the position has been stored.

Storing a new position cancels the previous position.

Recalling a stored position

Ignition on or engine running

Press button 1 or 2 to recall the corresponding position.

An audible signal confirms that adjustment is complete.

You can interrupt the current movement by pressing button 1 or 2 or by using one of the seat controls.

A stored position cannot be recalled while driving.

Recalling stored positions is deactivated

45 seconds after switching off the ignition.

3

87

Comfort

Additional adjustments

88

Head restraint height and angle

(depending on version)

To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.

To lower the head restraint, press the lug A and the head restraint at the same time.

To adjust the angle of the head restraint, tilt its lower part forwards or rearwards.

The head restraint is fitted with a frame with notches which prevents it from lowering; this is a safety device in case of impact.

The adjustment is correct when the upper edge of the head restraint is level with the top of the head.

Removing a head restraint

To remove the head restraint, press the lug A and pull the head restraint upwards. engage the head restraint stems in the openings keeping them in line with the seat back and press the lug at the same time.

Comfort head restraints

Depending on version, you can fold the sides to obtain a more comfortable position.

Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and adjusted correctly.

Comfort

Electric lumbar adjustment Massage function

3

Press the control to obtain the desired lumbar support.

Activation

Press this switch.

Its indicator lamp comes on and the massage function is activated for a period of 1 hour.

During this time, massage is performed in

6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage followed by 4 minutes break).

After one hour, the function is deactivated, the indicator lamp goes off.

Deactivation

You can deactivate the massage function at any time by pressing this switch, its indicator lamp goes off.

This function provides the front occupants with a lumbar massage. It only operates when the engine is running or in STOP mode of the

Stop & Start system.

Adjustment of intensity

Press this button to select one of the two levels of massage intensity offered.

89

Comfort

Electric leg rest Heated seats control

90

Manual passenger seat

Press the front or rear part of the control to unfold or fold away the leg rest.

The movement stops when you release the control.

Electric passenger seat

Push the control forwards or backwards to unfold or fold away the leg rest.

The movement stops when you release the control.

Use the adjustment wheel to switch on and select the level of heating required:

0: Off.

1: Low.

2: Medium.

3: High.

With the engine running, the front seats can be heated separately.

Before operating the leg rest, ensure that nothing could interfere with its movement.

Front armrest

Comfort system for the driver and front passenger.

Height adjustment

Fully lower the armrest.

Raise it to the required position (low, intermediate or high).

Once in the high position, lift to release it and return it to the low position.

Comfort

3

91

92

Comfort

Second-row seats

The 3 seats in the 2 nd row are independent of each other and are all the same width. Their backrests can be folded to vary the load space in the boot.

Forwards-backwards adjustment

Raise the lever A , located at the front of the seat cushion, and adjust the seat to the desired position.

Comfort

"Comfort" position Rear head restraints

3

Pull the strap B and guide the seat rearwards.

The backrest reclines and the seat base pivots slightly.

The rear head restraints can be removed and have two positions:

- high, position for use,

- low, storage position.

To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.

To lower it, press lug A then the head restraint.

Returning the seat to the initial position

Pull the strap B and guide the seat forwards.

Supervise any movements of seats when made by children.

To remove it:

- move the head restraint to the high position,

- press A pulling the head restraint upwards at the same time.

To refit it:

- engage the rods of the head restraint in the openings keeping then in line with the seat back.

Comfort head restraints

Depending on version, the sides can be folded to obtain a more comfortable position.

Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and correctly adjusted.

93

94

Comfort

Flat floor

Each seat can be folded onto the floor to vary the the space available in the boot.

Folding a seat

Place the seats in the fully back position.

From the outside

Pull C , as indicated by the arrow, to unlock the seat; keep pulling until the seat is fully folded.

Push the seat backrest gently forwards so that the backrest folds onto the seat cushion. The assembly lowers onto the floor.

From the boot, when loading for example

You can fold the second-row seats from the boot, after first folding the third-row seats.

Pull on the strap D to release the seat in question then push forwards lightly on the backrest.

To avoid any damage to the mechanism, the strap D unclips if too much force is applied. Simply clip it in place again for the system to be operational again.

Comfort

3

Repositioning a seat

If necessary, straighten the continuity panels for the seats in the 2 nd row and lock them in place.

Raise the backrest and push it rearwards until it locks in position

Before operating the rear seats, check that the outer rear seat belts are not loose, to avoid damaging them. The centre belt must be stowed. Fix the tongues of the three belts to their anchorage points.

Continuity panels

Each seat has a continuity panel at the bottom of the backrest, that once unfolded:

- provides a continuous load surface in the boot, whatever the position of the seats, the 2 nd row.

Releasing / locking the continuity panels

Before unfolding the continuity panels, row are fully back. release.

Straighten the continuity panel, then slide the latch downwards to lock it.

These continuity panels are not designed to support a weight greater than 30 kg.

95

Comfort

96

Access to the third row seats

Access to the third-row seats is via the outer second-row seats.

Leaving the vehicle from the third-row seats

Repositioning a seat, from the outside, with the door open

If there are passengers seated in the third row: manually return the assembly as far as possible rearwards; the seat does not return to the fully back position, so as to retain legroom for the third-row passengers, fold the seat cushion until it locks.

Ensure that there is no object on or under the seat that you want to move.

Pull the lever E . The seat unlocks and the seat cushion comes up against the backrest.

Hold the lever E in the raised position, pushing forwards. The whole seat slides towards the front seat.

Space becomes free behind the seat, the thirdrow passengers can get to their seats.

Before operating the seats, ensure that the tables on the back of the first-row seats are folded away.

Lift E . The seat unlocks and the seat cushion comes up against the backrest.

Push the seat backrest, still holding the lever E in the raised position.

In the event of a failure of this system

(lever E ), the passengers in the third row can also leave the vehicle after first folding the backrests of the second-row seats using the strap D .

Do not allow children to operate the seats without supervision.

Third row seats

Concertina boards

Two rigid concertina boards, which cannot be separated from the vehicle, cover the

2 third-row seats, when these are in the folded position.

Comfort

Repositioning the seats

3

Each of the two floor panels can support a load of 100 kg.

Folding the concertina boards

Pull on the control, the 3 sections of the board will fold like a concertina.

When the third-row seats are upright, these concertina boards can be left either:

- flat behind the seats,

- in the vertical position, thereby leaving a storage area available.

Remove the luggage net (see the "Boot fittings" section).

Return the second-row continuity panels to their initial position and lock them.

Fold the concertina boards and position them vertically.

Pull on the strap F located behind the seat backrest. The backrest pivots rearwards, pulling the seat base with it. The seat locks in the open position.

97

Comfort

Folding the seats

98

Return the second-row continuity panels to their initial position and lock them.

Lower the head restraints.

Correctly position the concertina board vertically behind the seat.

Check that the seat belts for the 3 rd row seats are correctly fixed to the loops and are not folded.

Pull the strap G , located at the bottom of the seat backrest. The seat unlocks.

Next push the backrest gently forwards.

The backrest pivots, folding onto the seat base. The seat base then folds into the stowage area provided for that purpose.

Reposition the concertina boards over the folded seats.

Before moving the third-row seats, return the rigid floor plates of the second-row seats to the upright position and lock them.

Do not try to fold a third-row seat that has not first had the backrest fully locked in place.

Do not leave objects either on or underneath the seat bases of the thirdrow seats when you are folding them. as you fold the seats, as you risk trapping your fingers.

Do not allow children to operate the seats without supervision.

Seat modularity and con

fi

gurations

Examples of configurations

5 seats 3 seats

4 seats Maximum loadspace

Comfort

3

99

100

Comfort

Examples of seat configurations

7 seats

6 seats

Maximum loadspace 4 seats

For easy modification of your interior vehicle space, all the rear seats can be individually folded: onto the second-row floor, and under the thirdrow floor. You can then have a load floor that is continuous up to the front seat backrests.

The seats must only be folded and unfolded with the vehicle stationary.

5 seats

Comfort

Mirrors

Door mirrors

Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass providing the lateral rearward vision necessary for overtaking or parking. They can also be folded for parking in confined spaces.

Adjustment

Move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror.

Move control B in all four directions to adjust.

Return control A to the central position.

Demisting - Defrosting

Demisting-defrosting of the door mirrors operates with the engine running, by switching on the heated rear screen (refer to the "Rear screen demist-defrost" section).

The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear.

Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.

Folding

From outside: lock the vehicle using the electronic key or the Keyless Entry and

Starting system.

From inside: with the ignition on, pull the control A in the central position rearwards.

3

If the mirrors are folded using control A , they will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked. Pull again on control A .

Unfolding

From outside: unlock the vehicle using the electronic key or the Keyless Entry and

Starting system.

From inside: with the ignition on, pull the control A in the central position rearwards.

The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

If necessary, it is possible to fold the mirrors manually.

101

Comfort

102

Automatic tilting in reverse gear

System which provides a view of the ground during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear.

Rear view mirror

Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward view.

Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...

As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the "blind spot".

With the engine running, on engaging reverse gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards.

They return to their initial position:

a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear,

- once the speed of the vehicle exceeds

6 mph (10 km/h),

Manual day/night model Automatic day/night model

This function can be deactivated in the

" Driving assistance " menu, then " Vehicle settings ".

Adjustment

Adjust the mirror so that the glass is directed correctly in the "day" position.

Day / night position

Pull the lever to change to the "night" antidazzle position.

Push the lever to change to the normal

"day" position.

By means of a sensor, which measures the light from the rear of the vehicle, this system automatically and progressively changes between the day and night uses.

In order to ensure optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

Child surveillance mirror

Steering wheel adjustment

A child surveillance mirror is fitted above the rear view mirror. This allows you to monitor the vehicle’s rear passengers, or it can facilitate conversation between the front and rear passengers without the need to move the rear view mirror.

It can be folded away to eliminate dazzle.

When stationary , pull the control lever to release the adjustment mechanism.

Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position.

Push the control lever to lock the adjustment mechanism.

As a safety precaution, these operations should only be carried out while the vehicle is stationary.

Comfort

3

103

104

Comfort

Ventilation

The air circulating in the passenger compartment is filtered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen or from the inside in air recirculation mode.

Air treatment

The incoming air follows various routes depending on the controls selected by the driver:

- direct arrival in the passenger compartment

(air intake),

- passage through a heating circuit (heating),

- passage through a cooling circuit (air conditioning).

Control panel

The controls of this system are accessible in the " Air conditioning " menu of the touch screen tablet A .

The demisting/defrosting controls for the windscreen and rear screen are located on the left of the touch screen tablet.

Air distribution

1.

Windscreen demisting-defrosting vents.

2.

Front light demisting-defrosting vents.

3.

Front side window demisting/defrosting vents.

Adjustable side air vents.

4.

Central adjustable air vents.

5.

Air

6.

Side vents for the 2 nd row.

7.

Air nd row footwells.

8.

Sunshine sensor.

Comfort

Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning

In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance guidelines below:

To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well as the air extractor located in the boot.

Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation of the digital air conditioning system.

Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it in perfect working order.

Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter elements replaced regularly.

We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).

To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have it checked regularly as recommended in the maintenance and warranty guide.

If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

If after an extended stop in sunshine, the interior temperature is very high, first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few moments.

Put the air flow control at a setting high enough to quickly change the air in the passenger compartment.

The air conditioning system does not contain chlorine and does not present any danger to the ozone layer.

The condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.

When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability.

Stop & Start

The heating and air conditioning systems only work when the engine is running. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, you can temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start system (see the corresponding section).

3

105

106

Comfort

Heating

The heating system works only when the engine is running.

Press the button for the " Air conditioning " menu to display the page for the system controls.

The symbol for airflow (a fan) fills progressively according to the air flow setting made.

By reducing the air flow to the minimum, you are stopping ventilation of the passenger compartment.

The air distribution can be varied by using more than one button.

Each press of a button activates or deactivates the function.

The indicator lamp is on when the button is activated. For an even distribution of air in the passenger compartment, the three buttons can be activated simultaneously. Avoid driving for too long without ventilation (risk of misting and deterioration of air quality).

Temperature adjustment

Press one of these buttons, or move the cursor from blue

(cold) to red (hot) to adjust the temperature to your wishes.

Air flow adjustment

Press one of these buttons to increase or decrease the speed of the booster fan.

Air distribution adjustment

Windscreen.

Footwells.

Centre and side vents.

Air intake / Air recirculation

The intake of exterior air prevents and eliminates misting of the windscreen and side windows.

The recirculation of interior air prevents exterior odours and smoke entering the passenger compartment.

Press this button to recirculate the interior air. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

Press the button again to allow the intake of exterior air. This is confirmed by the indicator lamp going off.

Comfort

Dual-zone manual air conditioning with temperature regulation

The air conditioning system operates with the engine running.

The temperature at the nozzles and vents is regulated by the system according to the temperature in the passenger compartment and the temperature setting.

Press the button for the " Air conditioning " menu to display the system controls page.


The driver and front passenger can each adjust the temperature.

Press one of these buttons to reduce (blue) or increase (red) the value.

Air flow adjustment

Press one of these buttons to increase or decrease the speed of the air booster fan.

The value indicated corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit (depending on the unit selected).

A setting of around 21 provides optimum comfort. Depending on your requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is normal.

The air flow symbol (a fan) fills progressively according to the quantity of air wanted.

By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are stopping ventilation.

In addition, it is recommended that a difference between left and right of more than 3 should be avoided.

Avoid driving too long without ventilation

(risk of misting and deterioration of air quality).

3

107

108

Comfort


These buttons are used to arrange the distribution of air in the passenger compartment by combining several air outlets.

Windscreen.

Footwells.

Central and side vents.

The air distribution can be adapted by using several buttons: illumination of the indicator lamp confirms the presence of fan boosted air in the direction indicated, the indicator lamp off indicates the absence of fan boosted air in the direction indicated.

For a uniform distribution of air in the passenger compartment, the three buttons can be activated simultaneously.

Air intake / Air recirculation Air conditioning On / Off

The intake of exterior air prevents the formation of mist on the windscreen and side windows.

The recirculation of interior air isolates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and smoke.

The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.

It enables you to:

- lower the temperature, in summer, in winter, above 3°C.

This function allows hot or cold air to be delivered selectively and more quickly.

Press the button to recirculate the interior air. The indicator lamp comes on.

Press the button again to permit the intake of exterior air. The indicator lamp goes off to confirm this.

Switching on

Press this button, the associated indicator lamp comes on.

The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment is set to off .

Avoid driving too long without recirculation of interior air (risk of misting and deterioration of air quality).

Switching off

Press the button again, the associated indicator lamp switches off.

Comfort

Dual-zone digital air conditioning

This air conditioning system operates with the engine running, but the ventilation and its controls are available with the ignition on.

Operation of the air conditioning and regulation of temperature, air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment are automatic.

Press the button for the " Air conditioning " menu to display the controls for the air conditioning system.

Depending on the colour scheme chosen, the system controls page is displayed differently:


The driver and front passenger can each set the temperature.

Press one of these buttons to increase the value.

Press one of these buttons to decrease the value.

3

It is recommended that you avoid a left/right setting difference of more than 3.

The value indicated corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a precise temperature.

1.

Automatic mode.

2.

Driver's side temperature adjustment.

3.

Passenger's side temperature adjustment.

4.

Air

5.

Air distribution adjustment.

6.

Air

7.

Air

109

110

Comfort

Automatic comfort programme

Press the "AUTO" button to activate or deactivate the automatic mode of the air conditioning system.

When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the air conditioning system operates automatically: the system manages the temperature, air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment in an optimum way according to the comfort level you have selected.

It is possible to modulate the intensity of the automatic comfort programme by choosing one of three mode settings offered in a secondary page of the " Air conditioning " menu.

To change the current setting, shown by the green indicator lamp, press the button for the desired mode:

"Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by limiting air flow.

"Normal": offers the best compromise between a comfortable temperature and quiet operation (default setting).

"Fast": provides strong and effective air flow.

This setting is associated with AUTO mode only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode, the indicator for the last setting remains on.

Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO mode if deactivated.

In cold weather with the engine cold, the air flow is increased gradually until the system has warmed up, in order to limit the delivery of cold air into the passenger compartment.

On entering the vehicle, if the interior temperature is much colder or warmer than the comfort value setting, there is no need to alter the value displayed in order to reach more quickly the required level of comfort. The system compensates automatically and corrects the temperature difference as quickly as possible.

Comfort

Resuming manual control

You can manually adjust one or more settings, while retaining automatic control of the other functions:

- air distribution.

As soon as you modify a setting, the indicator lamp in the " AUTO " button goes off.

Press the "AUTO" button again to activate the automatic comfort programme again.

Air

fl

ow adjustment

Press one of these buttons to increase or decrease the speed of the booster fan.

The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in progressively in relation to the quantity of air wanted.

By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are stopping ventilation.

" OFF " is displayed alongside the fan.

Avoid driving for too long with the ventilation off (risk of misting and deterioration of air quality).


You can modulate the distribution of air in the passenger compartment using these three buttons.

Windscreen.

Footwells.

Centre and side vents.

Each press on a button activates or deactivates the function. The indicator lamp is on when the button is activated. For a uniform distribution in the passenger compartment, all three buttons can be pressed simultaneously.

In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three buttons are off.

3

111

112

Comfort

Air conditioning On/Off

The air conditioning is designed to operate efficiently in all seasons, with the windows closed.

It allows you:

- in summer, to lower the temperature,

- in winter, above 3 °C, to improve demisting.

Switching on

Press the "A/C" button to activate the air conditioning

When the indicator lamp under the button is on, the air conditioning function is activated.

The air conditioning cannot operate when the air flow is set to off.

Switching off

Press the "A/C" button again to deactivate the air conditioning

When the indicator lamp under the button is off, the air conditioning function is deactivated.

Air intake/Air recirculation "Mono" function

The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the windscreen and side windows.

Air recirculation prevents exterior odours and smoke from entering the passenger compartment.

This function also allows faster heating or cooling of the air in the passenger compartment.

Press this button to choose the mode for air entry to the passenger compartment.

When the indicator lamp under the button is off, the intake of exterior air is active.

When the indicator lamp under the button is on, air recirculation is activated, the intake of exterior air is off.

The comfort setting for the passenger's side can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting

(mono-zone).

From the secondary page of the " Air conditioning " menu:

Press this button to activate / deactivate the "Mono" function.

The indicator lamp in the button is on when the function is activated.

The function is deactivated automatically when the passenger uses their temperature setting buttons.

Avoid prolonged operation of the air recirculation function (risk of misting and of deterioration of the air quality).

Comfort

"Rear" function

This function gives rear passengers access to the adjustment controls and allows.

- the distribution of air conditioned air to the nd row of seats,

- the distribution of ambient air to the vents for the 3 rd row of seats.

From the secondary page of the " Air conditioning " menu:

Press this button to activate / deactivate the "Rear" function

The indicator lamp in the button is on when the function is activated.

Settings for passengers in the 2

nd

row of seats

Turn the upper wheel to open or close the rear vent.

Turn the lower knob to reduce (to the left) or increase (to the right) the air flow.

Settings for passengers in the

3

rd

row of seats

Press the vent cover.

Adjust the flow of air to the two vents using the four-position wheel (off, low, medium, high).

Direct the vent by turning the cover.

3

113

114

Comfort

Ventilation with ignition on function

With the ignition on, you can use the ventilation system and have access to the " Air conditioning " menu to adjust the air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment.

This function is available for a few minutes, depending on the state of charge of the battery of your vehicle.

Front Demist - Defrost

Press this button to demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows as quickly as possible.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

The system automatically manages the air conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides optimum distribution towards the windscreen and side windows.

To switch it off press this button, the indicator lamp goes off.

This function does not activate the air conditioning.

You can make use of the residual heat in the engine to warm the passenger compartment using the temperature setting buttons.

With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the STOP mode is not available.

Comfort

Rear screen demist - defrost

Switching off

The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current.

It is possible to stop the demisting/ defrosting operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing the button again. The indicator lamp associated with the button switches off.

Switching on

Press this button to demist/defrost the rear screen and (depending on version) the door mirrors. The indicator lamp associated with the button comes on.

Switch off the heating of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as you judge it possible, as reducing the consumption of electrical current reduces fuel consumption.

3

The rear screen demist - defrost can only operate when the engine is running.

115

Comfort

Scented air freshener

The scented air freshener releases a fragrance into the passenger compartment via the central air vents.

To remove the air freshener To insert the air freshener

The air freshener contains an empty cartridge when your vehicle is delivered.

You therefore need to insert a cartridge in order to use the air freshener.

Adjustment of flow

116

Rotate the button A to adjust (to the left to reduce, to the right to increase) or stop

(maximum to the left) the flow of scented air.

The central air vents have to be open.

A cartridge lasts on average 3 months, based on one hour’s usage per day.

Press the button A , rotating it a quarter turn to the left as far as it will go.

Remove the air freshener from the dashboard.

Replace the cartridge (see "Replacing a cartridge").

After fitting or changing a cartridge: place the air freshener back in its housing. rotate it a quarter turn to the right.

Comfort

Air freshener button Replacing a cartridge

The recharge for the air freshener consists of a cartridge and its sealed container C .

Remove the protective film D .

Place the head of the cartridge B on the button of the air freshener.

Rotate it a quarter turn to lock it on the button and remove the container.

Insert the air freshener into its housing.

You can change cartridges at any time, keeping the used cartridges in their original containers.

The air freshener button A is independent of the cartridge. Cartridges are supplied without the air freshener button A .

The button of the air freshener A can only be fitted to the centre of the dashboard with a cartridge attached.

Therefore always keep the air freshener button A and one cartridge.

Replacement cartridges are available, depending on country, either on the Internet site or from a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Locations are provided in the glove box for storing cartridges and containers.

For safety, use only cartridges that are provided for this purpose.

Retain the containers for storing used cartridges.

Do not recharge or dismantle the cartridges.

Keep them out of reach of children and animals.

Avoid all contact with the skin and with the eyes.

In the event of ingestion, consult a doctor and show them the product packaging or label.

Do not install or remove a cartridge while you are driving.

3

117

118

Comfort

Front

fi

ttings

2.

Card holder.

3.

Glove box.

4.

Central

It contains the power and audio sockets.

5.

Raised console with closed storage, low console or removable console.

6.

Cup holder.

7.

Door

8.

Storage below the steering wheel.

(Handbook pack).

Sliding sun visor

Sliding blinds Sun visor rails

Glove box

Comfort

3

Sliding blinds are provided for your protection against bright sunlight. They can be adjusted manually.

Slide the blind to the desired position by pushing at .

The blinds are extended on the sun visor rails.

Fold the visor downwards, to protect against dazzle to the face.

If dazzle is coming from the side windows, detach the visor from its housing above the centre of the windscreen and pivot it to the side.

The visors are fitted with a locking system on their central housing when the blind is reeled in.

To detach the visor or to reposition it, it must be in a vertical position.

Depending on equipment, it may contain a CD player.

To open the glove box, raise the handle.

It is illuminated when the lid is opened.

It is cooled by a manual directional ventilation nozzle.

It is connected directly to your vehicle's air conditioning system and is supplied with cool air whatever the temperature setting for the passenger compartment.

The refrigeration of your glove box operates only with the engine running and the air conditioning on.

Do not attach or suspend heavy objects on the slide rail of the sun blind.

119

120

Comfort

Removable console

The removable console is a portable storage space secured to the lower centre console.

It has a sliding lid, an open storage space and two cup holders.

Releasing the removable console

Refitting the removable console

Raise the locking control located at the front of the console.

With one hand, lift the front part of the console.

With the other hand, grasp the rear part to release the removable console.

Carry out these operations in reverse order. Ensure that the console has locked into place.

When not fixed to its carrier, the removable console should be stowed in the boot. It could become a projectile in the event of a sudden stop or violent impact.

Comfort

Central storage compartment

230 V / 50 Hz power socket

3

To open the central storage compartment, pull the grip and lower the cover.

It is illuminated on opening.

A button on the upper part allows the lighting to be deactivated.

Depending on equipment, it may contain:

- one 230 V socket,

- one 12 V socket,

- one or two USB ports,

A 230 V / 50 Hz socket (maximum power:

120 W) is fitted in the central storage box.

To use the socket:

check that the warning lamp is on green, device (telephone charger, laptop computer, CD-DVD player, baby food warmer...).

This socket works with the engine running, as well as in STOP mode with Stop & Start.

In the event of a fault with the socket, the green warning lamp flashes.


Connect only one device at a time to the socket (no extension or multi-way connector).

Connect only devices with class II insulation (shown on the device).

As a safety measure, when electrical consumption is high and when required by the vehicle's electrical system

(particular weather conditions, electrical overload...), the current supply to the socket will be cut off; the green warning lamp goes off.

121

Comfort

12 V accessory socket Auxiliary socket USB ports

122

To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and connect a suitable adaptor.

The auxiliary socket is located in the central storage box.

It permits the connection of a portable device, such as a digital audio player of the iPod type, to listen to your music files using the vehicle's speakers.

The management of the files is done using your portable device.

Depending on equipment, one or two USB ports are located in the central storage box.

They allow the connection of a portable device or a USB memory stick.

They read the audio files which are transmitted to your audio equipment and played via the vehicle's speakers.

You can manage these files using the steering mounted or touch screen tablet controls.

When a USB port is used, the portable device charges automatically.

For more information on the use of this equipment, refer to the "Audio and telematics" section.

Only the right hand USB port can be used to connect an Apple ® player or the

"CITROËN MULTICITY CONNECT" connection key.

Comfort

Mats

Removable carpet protection.

Fitting Removal

To remove the mat on the driver's side:

move the seat as far back as possible,

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

- only use mats which are suited to the fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used,

remove the mat.

Refitting

To refit the mat on the driver's side:

position the mat correctly,

refit the fixings by pressing,

check that the mat is secured correctly.

The use of mats not approved by

CITROËN may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control / speed limiter.

The mats approved by CITROËN have two fixings located below the seat.

When fitting the mat for the first time, on the driver's side use only the fixings provided in the wallet attached.

The other mats are simply placed on the carpet.

3

123

124

Comfort

Storage boxes

Depending on equipment, storage boxes are located under the front seat.

Opening

Storage below the steering wheel

Raise the grip and lower the storage box cover.

Do not place heavy objects in the boxes.

This storage compartment below the steering wheel is intended for stowing your vehicle's handbook pack.

Rear

fi

ttings

Aircraft-style rear tables

Rear table stowed

Comfort

Individual reading lamps

3

Rear table opened

These tables, fitted to the backs of the front seats, incorporate a cup-holder recess A and a retaining strap B .

Reading lamps C may be fitted in the front seat backrests, behind the tables. They illuminate the surface of the tables without disturbing the other passengers.

They can be used only while the table is down.

Press the "on/off" button to turn the lamp on or off.

Pull the table downwards to open.

To stow the table, raise it until the latch locks.

For safety reasons, these tables collapse downwards if excessive pressure is exerted on them.

125

126

Comfort

Side blinds Storage wells 12 V accessory socket

Fitted to the windows for the 2 nd row seats, they protect the passenger compartment from the sun's rays.

Pull the tab A and anchor the blind on the hook B .

There are two storage wells under the rear passengers' feet.

To open them, lift the cover at the cutout.

To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and connect a suitable adaptor.

Comfort

Rear multimedia

Description

The pack includes:

- the connection and control panel fitted on the rear face of the centre console,

- two 7-inch screens built into the front head restraints (with protective covers),

- two wireless Bluetooth technology headphone sets with rechargeable batteries,

- a 12 V charger with two outlets allowing the simultaneous charging of two headphones,

This multimedia system allows rear passengers to connect one or two external portable systems (audio or video player, games consoles, DVD player...). The sound is played wireless headphone sets, while the video content is displayed in two

7-inch screens built into the backs of the front seat head restraints.

This system operates only with the engine running.

1.

Power switch

2.

AV1 video input (yellow RCA socket)

3.

Stereo audio input A (red and white RCA sockets)

4.

AV2 video input (yellow RCA socket)

5.

Stereo audio input B (red and white RCA sockets)

6.

Selection of display in the left hand screen

(AV1 or AV2)

7.

Selection of display in the right hand screen (AV1 or AV2)

8.

Connection indicator lamps for the

Bluetooth audio headphones (blue)

3

127

Comfort

Operation

It is possible at any time to modify the source for the video display (using button 6 or 7 on the control panel: the indicator lamp for the source selected comes on) as well as the audio channel (using the selector on the headphones).

The Multimedia system allows the connection of a third Bluetooth headphone set, not supplied.

128

1.

Screen power switch

2.

Display adjustment buttons

Each headphone set has a switch, a connection indicator lamp (blue) and a channel selector (A or B).

With the engine running, connect your portable system to the RCA connectors

(e.g. with AV1 on the left).

Press the switch on the control panel, the indicator lamp comes on and the AV1 indicator lamps come on.

Make a long press on the switch, its indicator lamp flashes in blue.

Make a long press on the control panel switch, the pairing with the headphone set is complete when the blue indicator lamps on the headphones and on the system are on continuously.

Repeat the operation for the other headphone set.

Press the screen switch if you have a video source.

Start playing your portable system.

If your seat is in the table position, position a cover to avoid damaging the screen.

These covers also conceal each screen.

Boot

fi

ttings

1.

Rear parcel shelf

(see details on a following page)

2.

Hooks


3.

Torch


4.

Storage boxes


5.

Storage net

6.

Lashing eyes

7.

12 V socket (maximum power: 120 Watts)

Versions with storage boxes: these boxes must be put in place before loading the boot.

Comfort

3

129

Comfort

Rear parcel shelf Hooks Storage boxes

130

To remove the shelf: unhook the two cords, raise the shelf slightly, then remove it.

There are several options for storing the shelf:

- or flat at the base of the boot.

The hooks can be used to secure shopping bags.

Remove the boot carpet for access to the storage boxes.

Depending on the configuration, they are laid out for storing:

- ...

Boot

fi

ttings

1.

Luggage cover blind


2.

Torch


3.

Concertina boards

4.

Lashing eyes

5.

12 V socket (maximum power: 120 Watts)

6.

Arm rest with cup holder and storage space

7.

Retaining

8.

Location for stowing the luggage cover blind

9.

Open storage

Comfort

3

131

132

Comfort

Luggage cover roller

In the 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind the second-row seats, with the third-row seats folded away.

In the 7-seat configuration, it is stowed behind the third row seats.

Installation

roller in cut-out A , with the mobile flap at the front.

Pull out the blind until it reaches the boot pillars. on the pillars B .

Removal

Disengage the roller guides from the rails in the pillars B .

Guide the blind as it is reeled in.

Unlock the roller by pressing one of the grips located at the ends of the reel support.

The mobile flap allows passengers in the second row to place their seats in the "comfort" position.

Stowing behind the 3

rd

row seats

Ensure that the 3 rd row seats are folded.

Fold the first two concertina boards.

Install the roller in the space above the arm rest, one side after the other, inclining it slightly.

Slide the roller as far as it will go, up to the cut-outs provided at the back of the boot, with the two flaps directed downwards.

Unfold the third row seats.

The folded concertina boards can be positioned horizontally or vertically.

To fold the 3 rd row seats with the roller stowed at the rear, it is necessary to raise the concertina boards in order to allow access to the seat locking controls (red straps).

Comfort

3

133

134

Comfort

Torch

This is a removable lamp, fitted in the side of the boot, which can be used to illuminate the boot or as a torch.

Use

Extract the torch from its location by pulling it from the front.

Press the switch, located on the back, to switch the torch on or off.

Unfold the support, located on the back, to set down and raise the torch; for example, when changing a wheel.

Operation

This torch operates with NiMH type rechargeable batteries.

It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes and charges while you are driving.

Storing

Put the torch back in place in its location starting with the rear.

If you have forgotten to switch off the torch, this switches it off automatically.

Observe the polarities when fitting the batteries.

Never replace the rechargeable batteries with single-use batteries.

It the torch is not engaged correctly, it may not charge and may not come on when the boot is opened.

Driving

Starting-switching off the engine with the electronic key

Starting the engine

If one of the starting conditions is not met, a reminder message appears in the instrument panel screen. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn the steering wheel slightly while pressing the "START/STOP" button to assist unlocking of the steering; a message warns you when this is needed.

4

Place the gear selector lever at for vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or neutral with a manual gearbox.


Press the brake pedal for vehicles with an electronic or automatic gearbox, or fully declutch for vehicles with a manual gearbox.

Briefly press the " START/STOP " button.

The steering column unlocks and the engine starts more or less immediately (see the advice for

Diesel versions).

For , in temperatures below zero the engine will not start until the preheater warning lamp has gone off.

If this warning lamp comes on after pressing "START/STOP", you should hold the brake or clutch pedal down until the warning lamp goes off and do not press the START/STOP button again.

135

136

Driving

Switching off the engine

Immobilise the vehicle.

Place the gear selector lever at N for vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N for an automatic gearbox, or neutral with a manual gearbox.

Emergency stop

In the event of an emergency only, the engine can be switched off without any conditions. To do this, press the "START/STOP" button for about three seconds.

In this case the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops

Briefly press the " START/STOP " button


Remove the electronic key from the reader.

If the vehicle is not immobilised, the engine will not stop.

Electronic key left in the reader

If the electronic key is left in the reader, on opening the driver's door a message appears to warn you.

Driving

Starting-switching off the engine with the "Keyless Entry and

Starting" system

Starting the engine

Briefly press the " START/STOP " button.

The steering column locks and the engine starts more or less instantly (see the advice for

Diesel versions).

If the electronic key is not detected in the zone, a message is displayed. Move the electronic key into the zone so that the engine can be started.

4

Place the gear selector lever at for vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N with an automatic gearbox, or neutral with a manual gearbox.

With the electronic key inside the vehicle

(it is not necessary to put it in the reader), press the brake pedal for vehicles with an electronic or automatic gearbox, or fully declutch for vehicles with a manual gearbox.

If one of the starting conditions is not met, a reminder message appears in the instrument panel screen. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn the steering wheel slightly while pressing the "START/STOP" button to assist unlocking of the steering; a message warns you when this is needed.

The presence in the defined zone of the electronic key for the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system is essential.

For safety reasons, do not leave this zone with the vehicle running.

For Diesel vehicles , in temperatures below zero the engine will not start until the preheater warning lamp has gone off.

If this warning lamp comes on after pressing "START/STOP", you should hold the brake or clutch pedal down until the warning lamp goes off and do not press the START/STOP button again.

137

138

Driving

Switching off the engine

Immobilise the vehicle.

Place the gear selector lever at N for vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N with an automatic gearbox, or neutral with a manual gearbox.

Emergency starting

With the electronic key inside

STOP " button.


If the vehicle is not immobilised, the engine will not stop.

Do not leave your vehicle with the electronic key still inside.

When the electronic key is in the defined zone and your vehicle does not start after pressing the "START/STOP" button:

Place the gear selector at N for vehicles with an electronic gearbox, P or N for vehicles with an automatic gearbox or neutral for vehicles with a manual gearbox.


Press the brake pedal on vehicles with an electronic or automatic gearbox, or fully declutch with a manual gearbox.

Press the "START/STOP" button.

The engine starts.

Emergency switch-off

In the event of an emergency only, the engine can be switched of without conditions. To do this, press and hold the "START/STOP" button for about

3 seconds.

In this case the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops.

Electronic key not recognised

If the electronic key is no longer in the defined zone when driving or when you (later) request switching off the engine, a message appears in the instrument panel.

Press and hold the "START/

STOP" button for about

3 seconds if you want to force switching off the engine ( note that restarting will not be possible without the key ).

Driving

4

139

140

Driving

Ignition on without starting

With the electronic key in the reader or the

Keyless Entry and Starting key inside the vehicle, pressing the "START/STOP" button, with no action on the pedals , allows the ignition to be switched on.

Press the "START/STOP" button, the instrument panel comes on but the engine does not start.

Press the button again to switch off the ignition and so allow the vehicle to be locked.

Anti-theft protection

Electronic engine immobiliser

The keys contain an electronic chip which has a secret code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible.

This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key.

In the event of a malfunction, you are informed by a message in the instrument panel screen.

In this case, your vehicle does not start; contact a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.

With the ignition on, the system goes into energy economy mode when necessary to maintain the state of charge of the battery.

Driving

Electric parking brake

Indicator lamp

This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel and in the control lever to confirm the application of the parking brake.

The system provides, in automatic operation, the application of the parking brake on switching off the engine and release as the vehicle moves off.

The driver can take over at any time to apply or release the parking brake, by operating the control lever:

- by briefly pulling the control lever to apply the brake,

- by briefly pushing the control lever, while pressing the foot brake, to release.

Automatic mode is activated by default.

It goes off to confirm the release of the parking brake.

The indicator lamp in the control lever flashes during manual application or release.

After the parking brake has been applied, the simultaneous flashing of the two indicator lamps in the instrument panel and the control lever alerts you to the need to fully secure your vehicle by engaging a gear (with a manual or electronic gearbox) or by placing the gear selector in position P with an automatic gearbox, or by fitting a chock to one of the wheels. (E.g. : parking on a very steep slope or on a slope with a low battery).

In the event of a battery failure, the electric parking brake no longer works.

As a safety measure, if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by engaging a gear or placing a chock at one of the wheels.


4

The technology adopted for the electric parking brake does not allow the fitment of wheels smaller than 16 inches.

141

Driving

142

Label on door panel

Before leaving the vehicle, check that parking brake is applied: the indicator lamps in the instrument panel and the control lever must be on fixed, not flashing.

If the parking brake is not applied, there is an audible signal and a message is displayed on opening the driver's door.

Never leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on, as they could release the parking brake.

When towing, parking on a steep slope, or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn the wheels towards the kerb and engage a gear (with a manual or electronic gearbox) or place the gear selector in position P with an automatic gearbox).

For towing, you vehicle is approved for parking on slopes of up to 12%.

Manual operation

Manual release

With the ignition on or the engine running, to release the parking brake: press the brake pedal, while maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, briefly push the control lever.

The complete release of the parking brake is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the

P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, accompanied by the display of the message

"Parking brake released".

If you push the control lever without pressing the brake pedal, the parking brake will not be released and a message is displayed.

Manual application

With the vehicle stationary: briefly pull the control lever.

Confirmation of the instruction is signaled by flashing of the indicator lamp in the control lever.

Application of of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever, accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake applied".

Driving

Automatic operation

Automatic release

Ensure first that the engine is running and the driver's door is properly closed.

The electric parking brake releases automatically and progressively when you press the accelerator:

Manual gearbox: fully depress the clutch pedal, engage 1 st or reverse gear; press the accelerator pedal and let up the clutch pedal.

Automatic gearbox: select position D , or

R then press the accelerator.

Electronic gearbox: select position M or

R then press the accelerator pedal.

The complete release of the parking brake is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the indicator lamp in the control lever going off, accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake released".

When stationary with the engine running, do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, you risk releasing the parking brake.

Automatic application

With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake is automatically applied when the engine is switched off by pressing the START/STOP button.


4

With the engine stalled or in STOP mode of Stop & Start, automatic application does not take place.

In automatic mode, you can manually apply or release the parking brake using the control lever.

143

144

Driving

Special cases

In some situations, you may need to operate the parking brake manually.

Immobilisation of the vehicle with the engine running

To immobilise the vehicle with the engine running, briefly pull the control lever.


Parking the vehicle with the brake released

In very cold conditions, it is recommended that the parking brake not be applied (risk of freezing).

To immobilise your vehicle, engage a gear or fit a chock to one of the wheels.

Immobilisation of the vehicle with the parking brake released

Switch off the engine.

Illumination of the warning lamps in the instrument panel and control lever confirm application of the parking brake,

Switch on the ignition again, without starting the engine.

Release the parking brake manually by pushing the control lever while keeping your foot on the brake.

The complete release of the parking brake is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the indicator lamp in the control lever going off, accompanied by the display of the message "Parking brake released".

Switch off the ignition.

Driving

Deactivating automatic operation

In some situations, such as very cold weather or towing (caravan, recovery), it may be necessary to deactivate automatic operation of the system.

Start the engine.

Apply the parking brake with the control lever, if it is released.

Take your foot off the brake pedal.

Push and hold the control lever in the release direction for at least 10 seconds and no more than 15 seconds.

Release the control lever.

Press and hold the brake pedal.

Pull the control lever in the apply direction for 2 seconds.

From this point the parking brake can only be applied and released manually using the control lever.

Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic operation.

Reactivation of automatic operation is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the instrument panel going off.

Emergency braking

The emergency braking should only be used in an exceptional situation.

In the event of a failure of the main service brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction, etc) a continuous pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle.

Braking takes place while the control lever is being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever is released.

The ABS and DSC systems provide stability of the vehicle during emergency braking.

If the emergency braking malfunctions, the message "Parking brake control faulty" will be displayed.

4

Deactivation of the automatic functions is confirmed by illumination of this indicator lamp in the instrument panel.

Release the control lever and the brake pedal.

If a failure of the ABS and DSC systems, signalled by the illumination of one or both warning lamps in the instrument panel, then stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed.

In this event, stability must be assured by the driver by repeating alternate "pull-release" actions on the control lever until the vehicle is immobilised.

145

146

Driving

The various alert situations are described in the table below.

In the event of a fault with the electric parking brake it is recommended that you contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

Situations

Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and the following warning lamps:

Consequences

- Automatic release is not available.

- If you attempt an automatic release, a help message is displayed on acceleration when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.

Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the following warning lamps:

- Secondary braking does not have full power.

- If automatic release is not available, a help message is displayed on acceleration when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.



- Automatic application is not available: use the control lever.

- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.

- If automatic release is also not available, a help message is displayed on acceleration when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.

- If manual application and release do not work, the control lever is faulty. automatically reactivated in the event of failure of the control lever.

- You can no longer immobilise the vehicle with the engine running.

Situations



Display of the message " Battery fault " and the following warning lamp:

Driving

Consequences

The Parking Brake is faulty, the manual and automatic functions may not operate.

When stationary , to immobilise your vehicle:

- Pull and hold the control lever for about 7 to 15 seconds, until the warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel.

If this procedure does not work, you should make your vehicle safe:

- Park on a level surface.

- Engage a gear with a manual or electronic gearbox, or place the gear selector in position P with an automatic gearbox.

- If possible, fit a wheel chock.

Call on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

4 in all situations.

You should make your vehicle safe:

- Park on a level surface.

- Engage a gear with a manual or electronic gearbox, or place the gear selector in position P with an automatic gearbox.

- If possible, fit a wheel chock.

Call on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

The flashing of the P warning lamps on starting the vehicle indicates that the parking brake is not correctly applied.

As soon as possible, stop the vehicle and try to completely release the parking brake, using the control lever, with your foot on the brake pedal.

- The state of charge of the battery is very low and requires immobilisation of the vehicle in a safe place: engage a gear with a manual gearbox or fit a chock to one of the wheels.

- Once the battery is completely discharged, the controls do not operate: to release the parking brake, call on a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

147

148

Driving

Hill start assist

System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when starting on a gradient, the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

This system only operates when:

- the vehicle is completely stationary, with your foot on the brake pedal,

Operation

The hill start assist system cannot be deactivated.

Do not exit the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase.

If you need to exit the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake manually then ensure that the parking brake warning lamp (and the warning lamp P in the lever of the electric parking brake) are on fixed (not flashing).

On an ascending slope, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held for a momentarily when you release the brake pedal: a manual gearbox,

- provided you are in position A or M on an electronic gearbox, or M on an automatic gearbox.

On a descending slope, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held momentarily when you release the brake pedal.

Operating fault

If a fault in the system occurs, these warning lamps come on, accompanied by an alert message. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

Driving


Engaging reverse gear


Engaging 5

th

or 6

th

gear

With clutch pedal fully down, place the gear lever in neutral.

Push the gear lever to the right then backwards.

Move the lever fully to the right to engage

5 th th gear.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.

Failure to follow this advice may cause permanent damage to the gearbox

(engagement of 3 rd mistake). or 4 th gear by

As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine:

- always select neutral,

- press the clutch pedal.

Engaging reverse gear

the gear lever to the left then forwards.

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.

4

As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine:

- always select neutral,

- press the clutch pedal.

149

150

Driving

6-speed electronic gearbox system

Six-speed electronic gearbox system which

Gear selector lever

offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation and manual gear changing.

There are two driving modes:

automated mode for automatic control of the gears by the gearbox, without any action on the part of the driver

- manual mode for sequential gear changing by the driver using the steering mounted paddles.

In automated mode, you can temporarily take over control of gear changing.

R.

Reverse selector lever.

N.

Neutral. position to start the engine.

A.

Automated mode.

Move the selector lever to position A to select this mode.

M.

Manual mode with sequential manual gear changing.

Move the selector lever to position M to select this mode, then use the steering mounted control paddles to change gear.

Steering mounted control paddles

+.

Change up paddle to the right of the steering wheel.

Pull the "+" steering mounted paddle towards you to change up a gear.

-.

Change down paddle to the left of the steering wheel.

Pull the "-" steering mounted paddle towards you to change down a gear.

The steering mounted paddles cannot be used to select neutral or to engage or disengage reverse gear.

Driving

Displays in the instrument panel Moving off

Select position N .

Press the brake pedal down fully.

Start the engine.

N appears in the instrument panel screen.

N.

Neutral

R.

Reverse

M. (gear engaged) Manual mode.

AUTO or A.

Automated mode.

N flashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, if the selector lever is not in position on starting.

The warning lamp comes on the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, if the brake pedal is not pressed on starting the engine.

Select automated mode (position A ) or manual mode (position M ) or reverse

(position R ).

Release the parking brake by pulling the control lever, if automatic operation has been deactivated.

Progressively take your foot off the brake pedal,

If the parking brake is released, the vehicle moves off.

If the parking brake is applied and the automatc mode is activated, accelerate progressively.

4

A or AUTO and 1 , R is displayed in the instrument panel.

151

152

Driving

Automated mode

Select position A .

AUTO or A and the gear engaged is displayed in the instrument panel.

The gearbox operates in auto-active mode, without any action on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear for:

- optimisation of fuel consumption,

- the profile of the road.

- the vehicle load.

For optimum acceleration, for example when overtaking another vehicle, press the accelerator pedal firmly past the point of resistance.

Never select neutral N when driving.

Temporary control of gear changing

You can temporarily take over control of gear changing using the "+" and "-" steering mounted paddles. If the engine speed allows, the instruction to change gear is acted on.

This function allows you to anticipate certain situations such as overtaking a vehicle or the approach to a corner.

After a few moments without any action on the control paddles, the gearbox resumes automatic control of the gears.

Manual mode

Select position M .

The gears engaged are displayed in succession in the instrument panel.

The gear change requests are only acted on if the engine speed permits.

It is not necessary to release the accelerator during gear changes.

When braking or slowing down, the gearbox changes down automatically to allow the vehicle to accelerate in the correct gear.

On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will not change up unless the driver acts on the steering mounted paddles.

You can change mode at any time by moving the selector lever from A to M or the other way round.

Never select neutral N while the vehicle is moving.

Driving

Reverse

To engage reverse gear R , the vehicle must be immobilised with your foot on the brake pedal.

Select position R .

Stopping the vehicle

Before switching off the engine, you can:

- move to position N to engage neutral, or not be possible to move the vehicle.

Engagement of reverse gear is accompanied by an audible signal.

At low speed, if reverse gear is requested, the

N indicator flashes and the gearbox goes into neutral automatically. To engage reverse, put the selector lever in position N , then position R .

In both cases, if automatic operation of the electric parking brake has been deactivated, you must apply the parking brake by pulling the control lever.

Operating fault

With the ignition on, the flashing of A or

AUTO , accompanied by an audible signal and a message, indicates a malfunction of the gearbox.


4

When immobilising the vehicle, with the engine running, you must place the selector lever in neutral N .

Before carrying out any work in the engine compartment, ensure that the selector lever is in neutral N and that the parking brake is applied.

Whatever the circumstances, you must manually apply the parking brake when parking, if automatic operation has been deactivated.

153

154

Driving

Automatic gearbox

This gearbox offers two driving modes.

- automated mode for automatic management of the gears by the gearbox, without any action on the part of the driver,

manual mode for sequential gear changing by the driver using the steering mounted paddles.

Gear selector lever

It is possible to change from one mode to the other at any time.

With the automated mode, you can temporarily take control of the gear changes at any time.

P.

Park.

- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake applied or released.

- Starting the engine.

R.

Reverse.

- Reversing, vehicle stationary and engine at idle.

N.

Neutral.

- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake applied.

- Starting the engine.

D.

Automatic operation.

M.

Manual operation with sequential changing of the six gears.

To come out of position P , move the gear selector to the right to the desired position, while keeping your foot on the brake pedal.

To select position P , move the gear selector to the highest position

(towards R ), then push it forwards and then to the left.

Only engage it when the vehicle is at a complete stop. In this position, the front wheels are locked. Ensure that the gear selector is correctly positioned.

To move the gear selector, switch on the ignition or start the engine.

If the battery is not sufficiently charged, it is not possible to move the gear selector.

Driving

Steering mounted control paddles Displays in the instrument panel Moving off

position P or N .

Start the engine.

Otherwise, there is an audible signal accompanied by a message.

If P is displayed in the instrument panel, although the gear selector is in another position, place the gear selector in position P to be able to start the engine.

4

+.

Control paddle for changing up, to the right of the steering wheel.

Pull the " " paddle towards you to change up.

-.

Control paddle for changing down, to the left of the steering wheel.

Pull the " " paddle towards you to change down.

When you move the gear selector, the symbol corresponding to its position is displayed in the instrument panel.

P.

Park.

R.

Reverse.

N.

Neutral.

D.

Drive

1 to 6.

Gears engaged in manual operation.

-.

Invalid value in manual operation.

With the engine running, press the brake pedal.

Select automated mode (position D ), manual mode (position M ) or reverse

(position R ).

The steering mounted control paddles cannot be used to select neutral or to select or come out of reverse.

If you do not press the brake pedal to come out of position P , this warning lamp or symbol appears in the instrument panel, accompanied by the message

"Place automatic gearbox in position P", flashing of in the instrument panel and an audible signal.

155

156

Driving

Check that the symbol displayed in the instrument panel agrees with the position engaged.

Progressively release the brake pedal.

If the parking brake is release, the vehicle moves off.

If the parking brake is applied and automatic operation is activated, accelerate away.

Never press the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time. Braking and acceleration should be done only with the right foot. Pressing both pedals together risks damaging the gearbox.

When the engine is running at idle, brakes releases, if position R , or M is selected, the vehicle will move even if the accelerator is not pressed.

Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle when the engine is running.

When carrying out a maintenance operation with the engine running, apply the parking brake and select position P .

Never select position N when driving.

If position N is engaged in error when moving, allow the engine to idle, then engage position D to accelerate.

Never select position P or R unless the vehicle is a a complete stop with the brake applied.

When you want to engage reverse, to avoid jolt, do not accelerate immediately after engaging R .

Changing into position R is accompanied by an audible signal.

Driving

Automated mode

Select position D .

D and the gear engaged are displayed in the instrument panel.

The gearbox operates in auto-active mode, without any action from the driver. It continuously selects the most appropriate gear according to the following conditions:

- optimisation of fuel consumption,

- driving style,

- relief of the road,

- vehicle load.

For maximum acceleration, without touching the gear selector, press the accelerator fully down (kick down). The gearbox changes down automatically and maintains the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached.

When braking, the gearbox changes down automatically for more effective engine braking.

When you take your foot of the accelerator pedal suddenly, the gearbox does not change up, so as to improve safety.

Temporary manual control of the gears

Manual mode

Select position M .

Use the " + " and " " steering mounted control paddles to change gear.

The gears engaged are displayed successively in the instrument panel.

When stationary or at very low speed, the gearbox automatically engages 1st gear.

In manual mode, it is not necessary to release the accelerator pedal when changing gear.

The change from one gear to another is only effected if the conditions of vehicle speed and engine speed allow; otherwise the automatic laws of operation are imposed temporarily.

If the engine speed is too high or too low, the display of the gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then the new gear engaged is displayed.

4

You can temporarily take control of gear changes using the " + " and " " steering mounted control paddles. If the engine speed allows, the instruction to change gear is acted on.

This function allows you to anticipate certain situations such as overtaking another vehicle or approaching a bend.

After a few moments with no action on the control paddles, the gearbox manages the gears automatically again.

Invalid value in manual operation

This symbol is displayed if a gear is not engaged correctly (gear selector between two positions).

It is possible to change mode at any time, by moving the gear selector from D to M or the other way round.

157

158

Driving

Parking the vehicle

Before switching off the engine, you can change to position P or N to be in neutral.

In either case, apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed in automatic mode.

If the lever is not in position P , on opening the driver's door or approximately 45 seconds after switching off the ignition there is an audible signal and a message appears: move the gear selector to position P ; the audible signal stops and the message disappears.

Whenever parking, you must apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle, if automatic operation has been deactivated.

Operating fault

In the event of a fault with the gearbox, the service warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message and an audible signal.

In this case the gearbox goes into back-up mode and stays in 3 rd gear. You may then feel a noticeable jolt when going from P to R and from N to R . This jolt does not present any risk to the gearbox.

Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) while also observing legal speed limits.


In all circumstances, ensure that the gear selector is in position P before leaving your vehicle.

Driving

Gear shift indicator

System which reduces fuel consumption by advising the driver to change up.

With an electronic gearbox, the system is only active in Manual mode.

Operation

Depending on the driving situation and your vehicle's equipment, the system may advise you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can follow this instruction without engaging the intermediate gears.

The gear engagement recommendations must not be considered compulsory. In fact, the configuration of the road, the amount of traffic and safety remain determining factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver remains responsible for deciding whether or not to follow the advice given by the system.

This function cannot be deactivated.

Example:

- You are in third gear.

higher gear.

The information appears in the instrument panel in the form of an arrow.

On vehicles with manual gearbox, the arrow can be accompanied by the recommended gear.

The system adapts its gear change recommendation according to the driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and the demands of the driver (power, acceleration, braking, ...).

The system never suggests:

- engaging first gear,

- engaging reverse gear,

- engaging a lower gear.

4

159

160

Driving

Stop & Start

The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or other...). The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently.

Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.

Operation

Going into engine STOP mode

The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine goes into standby automatically:

with a manual gearbox , at speeds below

12 mph (20 km/h), when you place the gear lever in neutral, and you release the clutch pedal,

- with an electronic gearbox, at speeds below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press the brake pedal or place the gear selector lever in position N ,

- with an automatic gearbox, with the vehicle stationary, when you press the brake pedal or place the gear selector lever in position N .

If your vehicle is fitted with the system, a time counter calculates the sum of the periods in

STOP mode during a journey. It resets itself to zero every time the ignition is switched on with the START/STOP button.

For your comfort, during parking manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available for a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear.

STOP mode does not affect the functionality of the vehicle, such as for example, braking, power steering...

Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the START/STOP button.

Special cases: STOP mode not available

STOP mode is not invoked when:

- the driver's door is open,

- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,

- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph

(10 km/h) since the last engine start using the START/STOP button,

- the electric parking brake is applied or being applied,

- the engine is needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment,

- demisting is active, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed to assure control of a system.

In this case, the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

Driving

Going into engine START mode

The "ECO" warning lamp goes off and the engine starts automatically:

with a manual gearbox , when you fully depress the clutch pedal,

- with an electronic gearbox :

● gear selector lever in position A or M , when you release the brake pedal,

● or gear selector lever in position N and the brake pedal released, when you place the gear selector lever in position A or M ,

● or when you engage reverse gear.

- with an automatic gearbox :

● gear selector in position D or M , when you release the brake pedal,

● or gear selector in position N and brake pedal released, when you place the gear selector in position D or M ,


Special cases: START invoked automatically

START mode is invoked automatically when:

- you open the the driver's door,

- you unfasten the driver's seat belt,

(25 km/h) with a manual gearbox, 7 mph

(11 km/h) with an electronic gearbox and

2 mph (3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox,

- the electric parking brake is being applied, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed for control of a system.

In this case the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.

This operation is perfectly normal.

Deactivation

Deactivation of Stop & Start is done in the

" Driving assistance " menu.

Press this button to deactivate the system.

This is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the button and this symbol.

If the system has been deactivated in STOP mode, the engine restarts immediately.

When driving on a flooded road, it is recommended that the Stop & Start function be deactivated and that you drive very slowly.

4

161

162

Driving

Reactivation Operating fault Maintenance

Press this button again.

The system is active again; this is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the button going off and illumination of this symbol.

The system is reactivated automatically every time the engine is started by the driver.

In the event of a fault with the system, this warning lamp comes on continuously.


In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the vehicle may stall.

All of the instrument panel warning lamps come on.

Depending on version, an alert message may also be displayed, asking you to place the gear selector lever in position N and put your foot on the brake pedal.

It is then necessary to switch off the ignition and start the engine again using the "START/

STOP" button.

This system requires a 12 V battery with a special specification and technology (reference numbers available from CITROËN dealers).

Fitting a battery not listed by

CITROËN introduces the risk of malfunction of the system.

For charging, use a 12 V charger and do not reverse the polarity.

Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from automatic operation of START mode.

The Stop & Start system makes use of advanced technology. For any work on the system go to a qualified workshop with the skills and equipment required, which a CITROËN dealer is able to provide.

Driving

Display of inter-vehicle time

Using a radar located at the front of the vehicle, this system helps the driver maintain a safe distance between their vehicle and the one in front, by displaying the inter-vehicle time in the instrument panel.

It is the time interval, expressed in seconds, that separates two vehicles in line. The recommended safe value is about 2 seconds: refer to the legislation or highway code in force in your country.

The system is active in a speed range between 42 and 93 mph (70 and

150 km/h).

Stationary vehicles and certain other road users (such as bicycles for example) are not detected.

The system displays inter-vehicle time values of between 3 seconds and 0.5 of a second.

Below 0.5 of a second, the value displayed is maintained at this level, even if the true inter-vehicle time is less.

Activation / deactivation

assistance " menu, with the ignition on.

Press this button, the indicator lamp comes on.

The state of the system is memorised when the ignition is switched off.

4

Activation of the active cruise control automatically deactivates the system.

The measurement is displayed for information only: the system takes no action on the vehicle.

This system does not in any circumstances replace the vigilance and responsibility of the driver who must remain in control of their vehicle at all times.

The system is not designed for urban use nor during more dynamic driving

(bends, acceleration, harsh braking…) but rather when driving at stable speed.

This system is only available with the

"DRIVING" display mode of the type 2 instrument panel.

163

164

Driving

Displays

Once the system has been activated and the speed conditions are met, a symbol is displayed in the instrument panel.

Symbol Associated message Comments

No vehicle detected by the radar.

A vehicle is detected but the inter-vehicle time is more than 3 seconds. No value is displayed.

A vehicle is detected. The inter-vehicle time is 3 seconds or less. The minimum value displayed is 0.5 seconds, even if the true inter-vehicle time is lower.

Driving

Symbol Associated message

" SYSTEM INACTIVE: Speed unsuitable "

Comments

If the speed of your vehicle is outside the operating range.

Where the speed is not suitable, a message is displayed while the speed is outside limits

(below 42 mph (70 km/h) or above 93 mph (150 km/h), approximately). However, when decelerating, the system is deactivated below 27 mph (45 km/h).

4

" System deactivated " On deactivating the function, in "DRIVING" display mode.

" SYSTEM INACTIVE:

Visibility reduced "

The system switches to standby automatically if the sensor does not detect the vehicle in front correctly (very difficult weather conditions, sensor out of adjustment, ...).

165

166

Driving

Operating limits Operating fault

The vehicle being followed may not be detected in certain conditions such as, for example:

- when the vehicle in front is out of the range of the sensor (maximum range: around

100 m).

In the event of a fault with the system, this warning lamp is displayed accompanied by a message.


At the first use of the system after repair, a message may be displayed indicating that the system is initialising.

The system is not available while this is in progress. As soon as the message disappears the system is operational again. If the message does not disappear, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

The operation of the radar, located in the front bumper, may be disturbed by accumulations of grime (dust, mud...) or in certain weather conditions (snow, ice...).

The message "SYSTEM INACTIVE:

Visibility reduced" is displayed to signal that the system has been put into standby.

Clean the front bumper regularly.

Driving

Memorising speeds

This function allows speeds to be saved, which can then be offered to set the two systems: the speed limiter (to limit the speed of the vehicle) or the cruise control (for a vehicle cruising speed).

You can memorise up to six speed settings for each of the two systems. By default, some speeds are already memorised.

Memorisation

Go to the " Driving assistance " menu.

Select the " ". 4

Select the system for which you want to memorise speeds:

● speed limiter or

● cruise control.

Choose the speed setting you want to modify.

Enter the new value using the numerical keypad and confirm.

Confirm to save the modification and quit the menu.

For safety reasons, the driver must carry out these operations when stationary.

This button allows you return to the factory settings.

167

168

Driving

Speed limiter

Once the programmed speed limit is reached, additional pressure on the accelerator pedal has no effect.

Displays in the instrument panel

System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.

The speed limiter is switched on manually: it requires a programmed speed of at least

20 mph (30 km/h).

The speed limiter is paused by operation of the control.

The programmed speed can be exceeded temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly beyond the point of resistance.

To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal until the vehicle returns to the programmed speed limit.

The programmed speed remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

Steering mounted controls

The controls are grouped together at the steering wheel.

1.

Speed limiter mode selection wheel.

2.

Value decrease button.

3.

Value increase button.

4.

Speed limiter on / pause button.

5.

List of memorised speeds display button.

The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

For more information on the list of memorised speeds, refer to the "Memorising speeds" section.

The information is grouped together in the instrument panel.

6.

Speed limiter on / pause indication.

7.

Speed limiter mode selection indication.

8.

Speed value setting.

Driving

Adjusting the speed limit setting

Turn wheel to the "LIMIT" position: the speed limiter mode is selected but is not switched on (Pause).

Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button 4 , if the speed displayed is suitable (by default, the last speed programmed).

You can temporarily stop the the speed limiter by pressing button again: the display confirms that it has been stopped

(Pause).

You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed.

Once the function is selected, you can modify the speed setting by:

- using buttons 2 and 3 , increasing or decreasing the speed displayed:

by successive short presses, to modify by + or - ½ mph (1 km/h),

by a maintained press, to modify in steps of + or - 3 mph (5 km/h).

- a press on button 5 : the six speeds memorised, displayed in the touch screen tablet, choosing a speed: it is displayed in the instrument panel.

The selection screen closes after a few moments.

4

169

Driving

170

Temporarily exceeding the programmed speed

Press firmly on the accelerator pedal, going beyond the point of resistance, to exceed the programmed speed limit.

The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the displayed programmed speed flashes.

An audible signal accompanies the flashing of the programmed speed when exceeding the speed is not due to an action by the driver

(steep hill...).

As soon as the vehicle's speed returns to the programmed value, the limiter operates again: the display of the programmed speed becomes steady again.

Operating fault

Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the speed limiter.


On sharp acceleration, as when descending a steep hill, the speed limiter will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.

The limiter is temporarily deactivated and the displayed programmed speed flashes.

An audible signal accompanies the flashing of the programmed speed when exceeding the speed is not due to an action by the driver.


CITROËN may interfere with the operation of the speed limiter.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: correctly,

Switching off

Turn wheel 1 to the position.

The display of information related to the speed limiter disappears.

Driving

Cruise control

System which automatically maintains the speed of the vehicle at the value programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.

The cruise control is switched on manually: it requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph

(40 km/h) and engagement of:

- at least fourth gear on a manual gearbox,

Steering mounted controls Displays in the instrument panel

gearbox, in manual driving mode,

- position A on an electronic gearbox or D on an automatic gearbox.

4

The cruise control is paused manually or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on triggering of the ESP system for safety reasons.

It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal.

To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal until the programmed cruise speed is reached again.

The controls of this system are grouped together at the steering wheel.

1.

Cruise control mode selection wheel.

2.

Decrease value or speed setting on the fly button.

3.

Increase value or speed setting on the fly button.

4.

Cruise control pause / resume button.

5.

Memorised speeds display button.

For more information on the list of memorised speeds, refer to "Memorising speeds" section).


6.

7.

8.

Cruise control pause / resume indication.

Cruise control mode selection indication.

Speed value setting.

Switching off the ignition cancels any programmed speed value.

The cruise control system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

You are advised to keep your feet near the pedals at all times.

171

Driving

172

Turn wheel 1 to the position: the cruise control mode is selected but is not switched on (Pause).

Press button 2 or 3 : your vehicle's current speed becomes the cruise speed (selected on the fly).

The cruise control is activated (ON).

Modi

fi

cation of the initial speed setting

If the cruise control is on, you can then modify the initial speed in one of the following ways:

- using buttons or 3 :

by successive short presses, to modify the speed by + or - 1 mph (km/h),

by a long press, to modify the speed in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h),

- pressing button 5 : the six memorised speeds are displayed in the touch screen tablet, choose a value: it is displayed in the instrument panel.

The selection screen closes after a few moments.

The modification is then accepted.

Pause

Once switched on, you can pause the cruise control at any time by pressing button 4 : the screen confirms the pause.

Driving

Exceeding the programmed speed

If the programmed speed is exceeded, the displayed speed flashes.

Once the vehicle returns to the programmed speed, the display becomes steady again.

Operating fault

Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the cruise control.


Switching off

Turn wheel to the "0" position. cruise control disappears.

When the cruise control is switched on, be careful if you maintain the pressure on one of the programmed speed changing buttons: this may result in a very rapid change in the speed of your vehicle.

Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads or in heavy traffic.

On a steep descent, the cruise control will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.

On steep climbs or when towing, the programmed speed may not be reached or maintained.


CITROËN may interfere with the operation of the cruise control.

To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:

- ensure that the mat is positioned correctly,

- never fit one mat on top of another.

4

173

174

Driving

Active cruise control

This systems allows, in addition to maintaining your vehicle's speed at a value that you have defined, the inter-vehicle time you have selected between your vehicle the the one ahead to be maintained (2 seconds by default, on activating the function).

Principles of operation

Using a radar with a range of about 100 metres, located at the front of the vehicle, this system detects a vehicle running in front of your vehicle.

It automatically adapts the speed of the vehicle to that of the vehicle in front.

If the vehicle in front is running more slowly, the system progressively reduces the speed of your vehicle using just engine braking (as if the driver had pressed the " " button).

If your vehicle is too close to or approaching too quickly the vehicle in front, the cruise control is automatically deactivated. The driver is then alerted by an audible signal, accompanied by a message.

If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes lane, the active cruise control progressively accelerates your vehicle to return to the programmed speed.

If the driver operates a direction indicator to the left (left hand drive) or the right (right hand drive), to overtake a slower vehicle, the active cruise control allows your vehicle to temporarily approach the vehicle in front to assist the overtaking manoeuvre, though never exceeding the programmed speed.

The active cruise control operates by day and at night, in fog or in moderate rainfall.

The activation of this system deactivates the function of inter-vehicle time.

The system does not act on the braking system, but works only with engine braking.

The regulation range is limited: there will no longer be any adjustment of speed if the difference between the programmed speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front becomes too high (18 mph (30 km/h).

If the difference between the programmed speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front is too great, the speed cannot be adjusted: the cruise control is automatically deactivated.

Driving

General points

The active cruise control is switched on manually: it requires that the speed of the vehicle be between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 90 mph

(150 km/h), as well as the engagement of:

- at least fourth gear with a manual gearbox, gearbox in manual mode,

- position A with an electronic gearbox or D with an automatic gearbox.

The active cruise control can above be paused manually with the control, or automatically:

- by pressing the brake or clutch pedal,

- in the event of operation of the DSC, for safety reasons, parking brake control,

- when an inter-vehicle time threshold is reached (calculated according to the relative speeds of your vehicle and the vehicle in front and the inter-vehicle time setting chosen),

- when the distance between your vehicle and the one in front becomes to small,

- when the speed of the vehicle in front is to low,

- when the speed of your vehicle becomes too low.

If the speed setting selected is above

93 mph (150 km/h), the system switches to normal cruise control operation

(a message appears in the instrument panel).

Switching off the ignition cancels any programmed value, and the intervehicle time is reset to 2 seconds.

The active cruise control cannot in any circumstances replace the observation of speed limits, nor the the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

It is recommended that you always keep your feet close to the pedals. 4

175

Driving

176

Steering mounted controls

The controls for this system are grouped together on the steering wheel.

1.

Cruise control mode selection wheel.

2.

Button or for setting the cruise value on the fly.

3.

Button for increasing the cruise value setting or for setting the cruise value on the fly.

4.

Button for pausing / resuming the cruise control.

5.

Button for displaying the list of memorised speeds and for adjusting the inter-vehicle time.

For more information on the list of memorised speeds, refer to "Memorising speeds".

Operation

Switching on

Turn the wheel to the " CRUISE " position: cruise control mode is selected, but not started (Pause).

Press one of the buttons 2 or 3 : the current speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting (set on the fly).

The cruise control is activated (ON).

The inter-vehicle time is set at 2 seconds.

Modi

fi

cation of the cruise control speed only

Buttons 2 and 3

By successive short presses, to modify by steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h),

by a maintained press, to modify in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h).

As a precaution, it is recommended that you select a speed setting close to the current speed of your vehicle.

Modi

fi

cation of the cruise control speed and/or the inter-vehicle time

Button 5 (MEM)

Press button 5 , the six memorised speeds and the inter-vehicle time setting are displayed in the touch screen tablet.

Choose a speed setting: it is displayed in the instrument panel, press or the " + " or " " button to choose a new inter-vehicle time setting between

2.5 seconds and 1 second.

The selection screen closes after a few moments. The modifications are then accepted.

If the active cruise control has not been switched on, pressing this button has no effect.

Driving

In the event of the presence of a vehicle detected by the radar, if the speed selected is much higher than the speed of that vehicle, the system is not activated and the alert message

"Activation not possible, conditions unsuitable" is displayed until driving conditions are safe to allow activation of the system.

Displays in the instrument panel

Exceeding the programmed speed

It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by depressing the accelerator pedal. Simply release the accelerator pedal to return to the programmed speed.

If the programmed speed is unintentionally exceeded, descending a steep hill for example, the speed setting in the instrument panel flashes as a warning.


6.

Indication of cruise control pause/resume.

7.

Indication of selection of cruise control mode, or

vehicle speed adjustment phase.

8.

Cruise speed setting, or adjusted speed lower than the cruise setting.

4

177

178

Driving

Driving situations and associated alerts

The table below describes the alerts and the messages displayed for the different driving situations.

The display of these alerts is not sequential.

Symbol

Display in the instrument panel

Associated message Comments

No vehicle detected: the system operates as a conventional cruise control.

Detection of a vehicle, at the limit of the range of the radar: the system operates as a conventional cruise control.

Driving

Symbol

Display in the instrument panel

Associated message Comments

"SPEED ADJUSTED" Detection of a vehicle that is too close or running at a speed lower than your vehicle's cruise speed setting.

The system uses engine braking to slow your vehicle and then hold it at the speed of the vehicle in front so as to maintain the programmed inter-vehicle time.

The regulation range is limited to a maximum difference of 20 mph (30 km/h) between the speed setting and the speed of the vehicle ahead.

4

"Cruise control paused".

If the system exceeds the limit of speed adjustment possible by the system and in the absence of any reaction by the driver (operation of the direction indicator, change of lane, reduction of the speed of the vehicle), the system is automatically paused.

The display of the deactivation message is accompanied by an audible signal. not possible, conditions unsuitable" is displayed while reactivation is not possible.

When the conditions allow, it is recommended that the function be reactivated by pressing button 2 or 3, which will make the current speed of your vehicle the new cruise speed setting, rather than by pressing button 4 (on/pause) which reactivates the cruise control using the old cruise speed setting, which may be very different from the current speed of your vehicle.

179

Driving

180

Limits of operation

The active cruise control uses only engine braking to slow the vehicle. Consequently the vehicle looses speed slowly, as when releasing the accelerator pedal.

The system is paused automatically: or too suddenly, and the driver does not brake,

- if a vehicle comes between your vehicle and the vehicle in front,

- if the system does not slow the vehicle enough to continue to maintain a safe distance, for example when descending a steep hill.

The regulation range is limited to a maximum difference of 20 mph (30 km/h) between the speed setting and the speed of the vehicle ahead. Above this, the system goes into pause if a safe distance is not maintained.

Severe weather conditions (very heavy rain, accumulations of snow in front of the radar) can interfere with the operation of the system, resulting in the display of the message "SYSTEM

INACTIVE: Visibility reduced". The function remains unavailable until the message disappears.

As the radar's field of view is quite narrow, it is possible that the system may not detect: motorcycles, for example,

- vehicles not running in the middle of the lane,

- vehicles entering a corner,

- vehicles changing lane at the last moment.

The cruise control does not take account of:

- stationary vehicles,

- vehicles driving in the opposite direction.

Driving

Operating fault

In the event of a fault with the active cruise control, you are alerted by an audible signal and display of the message message "Driving aid functions fault".


When the cruise control is working, take care if making a maintained press on one of the cruise control programmed speed modification buttons: this can lead to a very quick change in the speed of your vehicle.

Do not use the active cruise control on slippery surfaces or in heavy traffic.

When descending a steep hill, the cruise control may not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed.

When ascending a steep hill or when towing, it might not be possible to attain or maintain the programmed speed.


CITROËN may interfere with the operation of the cruise control.

To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:

- ensure that mats are positioned correctly,






4

181

182

Driving

Collision risk alert

System providing a warning to the driver that their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front.

The collision risk alert system can be activated or deactivated by the driver.

From the secondary page of the " Driving assistance " menu:

select the " Vehicle settings " menu,

check the " Collision risk alert " line and confirm.

This system operates from 20 mph

(30 km/h), only when other vehicles are running in the same direction as your vehicle; the system does not detect stationary objects. A radar is fitted at the front of the vehicle.

This function can be deactivated permanently by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Setting the thresholds for the alert

The alert thresholds determine how you want to be alerted to the presence of a vehicle running in front of you.

You can choose from three thresholds:

- 1: "Distant", to be given an early alert

(cautious driving).

- 2: "Normal".

- 3: "Close", to be given a later alert (sporty driving).

This system has been designed to improve driving safety.

It is the responsibility of the driver to keep a constant check on the state of the traffic, to assess the relative speed and distance of other vehicles.

The collision risk alert system can never replace the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

From the secondary page of the " Driving assistance " menu: select the " Vehicle settings " menu, check the " Collision risk alert " line, press on the magnifying glass, modify the alert threshold and press on

" Finish " to memorise the threshold and leave the menu.

Driving

Alerts

According to the collision risk detected by the system and the alert threshold chosen, three levels of alert can be triggered:

Level 1 : visual alert only (orange) indicating that the vehicle in front is very close. The message " Vehicle close " is displayed.

This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle time between your vehicle and the one in front.

Level 2 : visual (red) and audible alerts indicating that a collision is imminent. The message " Brake!

" is displayed.

This level of alert is based on a time before collision. It takes account of the vehicle dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the speed of the vehicle in front, the driving conditions, the situation with your vehicle

(cornering, pedals pressed, etc.) to trigger the alert at the right moment.

Level 3 : an increase in the tension of the driver's seat belt, to hold the driver against the backrest of their seat.

The 3 rd level of alert is not triggered or is interrupted in the event of an impact between the two vehicles.

The increase in the tension of the driver's seat belt is not intended as an alert for the driver: it does not in any circumstances assure the function of driver safety.

The triggering of this alert does not act on the safety functions provided by the seat belts.

The change from one level of alert to the next takes place if the driving conditions do not change (speed unchanged, no change of lane...)

If the speed of your vehicle is too high when approaching another vehicle, the first level of alert may not be displayed: the level 2 alert may be displayed directly.

On the other hand, the level 1 alert is never displayed with the triggering threshold 3 (close).

4

Severe weather conditions (very heavy rain, accumulation of snow in front of the radar) may interfere with the operation of the system, resulting in inactive: Reduced visibility ". The system remains unavailable until the message disappears.

183

184

Driving

Operating fault

In the event of a fault, you are alerted by the display of the Service warning lamp, accompanied by a message.

Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.





Driving

Lane departure warning system

Activation / deactivation Operating fault

The lane departure warning system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance and responsibility on the part of the driver.

Activation and deactivation of the function is done in the " Driving assistance " menu of the touch screen tablet.

Press this button, the indicator lamp comes on. The function is activated

Press this button again, the indicator lamp goes off. The function is deactivated

The status of the system remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.

In the event of a fault, this warning lamp comes on accompanied by an audible signal and a message.


4

System which, using a camera which recognises solid or broken lines, detects the involuntary crossing of longitudinal traffic lane markings on the ground.

To provide safe driving, the camera analyses the image then, if the driver's attention drops, triggers a warning if the vehicle drifts over a lane marking (speed higher than 50 mph

(80 km/h)).

This system is particularly useful on motorways and main roads.

Detection - alert

The driver is alerted by vibration of the seat belt

(at the level of the reel):

No warning is transmitted while the direction indicator is active and for approximately

20 seconds after the direction indicator is switched off.

The detection may be impeded:

- if the markings on the ground are worn,

- if there is little contrast between the markings on the ground and the road surface,

- if the windscreen is dirty, conditions: fog, heavy rain, snow, bright sunlight or direct exposure to the sun (low sun, leaving a tunnel, ...) and shade.

185

186

Driving

Blind spot sensors

This driving assistance system warns the driver of the presence of another vehicle in the blind spot angle of their vehicle (areas masked from the driver's field of vision), as soon as this presents a potential danger.

A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on the side in question:

- immediately, when being overtaken,

- after a delay of about one second, when overtaking a vehicle slowly.

Activation of the system is done in the " Driving assistance " menu, with the ignition on.

Press this button to activate the function; the associated indicator lamp comes on.

This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel.

Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers monitor the blind spots.

This system is designed to improve safety when driving and is in no circumstances a substitute for the use of the interior rear view mirror and door mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to constantly check the traffic, to asses the distances and relative speeds of other vehicles and to predict their movements before deciding whether to change lane.

The blind spot sensor system can never replace the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

Driving comes on in the door mirror on the side in question as soon as a vehicle - car, lorry, bicycle - is detected and the following conditions are fulfilled:

- all the vehicles must be moving in the same direction,

- the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and

87 mph (12 and 140 km/h), vehicle and the other vehicles must be less than 6 mph (10 km/h),

- the traffic must be flowing normally,

- in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre, if this is prolonged and the vehicle being overtaken remains in the blind spot,

- you are driving on a straight or slightly curved road,

- your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan...

No alert will be given in the following situations:

- in the presence of stationary objects

(parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs...),

- with vehicles moving in the opposite direction,

- driving on a sinuous road or a sharp corner, very long vehicle (lorry, coach...) which is at the same time detected at the rear in the blind spot angle and present in the driver's forward field of vision, front and behind are confused with a lorry or a stationary object,

- when overtaking quickly.

4

187

188

Driving

To deactivate the system, press this button again; its indicator lamp goes off as well as the associated indicator in the instrument panel.

The state of the system remains in memory on switching off the ignition.

Operating fault

In the event of a fault, the warning lamp flashes then goes off.


The system is automatically deactivated when towing with a towbar approved by

CITROËN.

The system may suffer temporary interference in certain weather conditions (rain, hail...).

In particular, driving on a wet surface or moving from a dry area to a wet area can cause false alerts (for example, the presence of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot angle is interpreted as a vehicle).

In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow.

Take care not to cover the warning zone in the door mirrors or the detection zones on the front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels or other objects; they may hamper the correct operation of the system.

High pressure jet wash

When washing your vehicle, direct the lance at least 30 cm away from the sensors.

Driving

Parking sensors

Rear parking sensors

The system is switched on by engaging reverse gear. This is accompanied by an audible signal.

The system is switched off when you exit reverse gear.

This system indicates the proximity of an obstacle (person, vehicle, tree, gate, etc.) which comes within the field of detection of sensors located in the bumper.

Certain types of obstacle (stake, roadworks cone, etc.) detected initially will no longer be detected at the end of the manoeuvre due to the presence of blind spots.

This function cannot, in any circumstances, take the place of the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

Audible assistance

The proximity information is given by an intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.

The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is located.

When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle becomes less than approximately thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous.

Visual assistance

This supplements the audible signal by displaying bars in the screen or the instrument panel which move progressively nearer to the vehicle. When the obstacle is near, the

"Danger" symbol is displayed.

4

189

190

Driving

Front parking sensors Operating fault

In addition to the rear parking sensors, the front parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h).

The front parking sensors are interrupted if the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in forward gear, if no further obstacles are detected or when the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).

Deactivation / Activation of the front and rear parking sensors

The system is deactivated in the " Driving assistance " menu in the touch screen tablet.

Press this button. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

Pressing this button again reactivates the system.

The indicator lamp in the button goes off.

In the event of a malfunction of the system, when reverse gear is engaged this warning lamp is by an audible signal (short beep).


displayed in the instrument panel and/ or a message appears, accompanied

The sound emitted by the speaker (front or rear) indicates whether the obstacle is in front or behind.

The system will be deactivated automatically if a trailer is being towed or a bicycle carrier is fitted on a towbar (vehicle fitted with a towbar installed in line with the manufacturer's recommendations).

In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty.

Certain sound sources (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger the audible signals of the parking sensor system.

The parking sensors are deactivated while the Park Assist system is measuring a space.

See the "Park Assist" section.


When washing your vehicle, do not direct the lance within 30 cm of the sensors.

Driving

Reversing camera

The reversing camera is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged.

Depending on version, the image is displayed in the touch screen tablet or the instrument panel.

The space between the blue lines represents the width of your vehicle except for the door mirrors.

The reversing camera function may be completed with parking sensors.

The reversing camera cannot in any circumstances be a substitute for the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

High pressure jet washing

When washing your vehicle, do not direct the lance within 30 cm of the camera lens.

The blue lines represent the general direction of the vehicle.

The red lines represent a distance of about

30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear bumper. The audible signal becomes continuous from this limit.

The green lines represent distances of about 1 and 2 metres beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear bumper.

The turquoise blue curves represent the maximum turning circle.

Opening the tailgate causes the display to disappear.

Clean the reversing camera regularly using a soft, dry cloth.

4

191

192

Driving

360 Vision

This system provides a view in the instrument panel of the near surroundings of your vehicle, using cameras mounted at the front and rear of your vehicle and under the door mirrors.

Depending on the angle of view chosen (front view, rear view or 360° panoramic view),

360 Vision provides special visual assistance in particular driving conditions such as when entering a blind crossing or monoeuvring in areas of reduced visibility.

Once activated, this function operates up to

9 mph (15 km/h). Above 18 mph (30 km/h), the function is deactivated automatically.

This system is a visual aid which in no circumstances can replace the vigilance and responsibility of the driver.

The images provided by the cameras may be deformed by the relief. The presence of areas in shade, in sunny conditions, or of low ambient light may darken the image and reduce contrast.

Forward vision

The camera located in the front bumper is activated and views of the areas located at front left and front right appear simultaneously in the instrument panel.

Rear vision

The camera located in the tailgate is activated and the view of the area behind your vehicle is displayed in the instrument panel and behaves like a reversing camera, whatever the position of the gear selector lever.

The blue lines represent the width of your vehicle (excluding mirrors): they move according to the position of the steering wheel.

The red line represents a distance of 30 cm from the rear bumper, and the two green lines, 1 m and 2 m from the rear bumper, respectively.

Rear vision is displayed automatically when engaging reverse, regardless of the state of the system.

Driving

Operation

360 vision

The cameras located in the front and rear bumpers and under the door mirrors are activated and a reconstruction of the view from above your vehicle in its immediate surroundings is displayed in the instrument panel.

Opening a door or the tailgate disturbs the 360 and rear views.

Fitting the very cold conditions screen affects the image transmitted by the front camera.

Activating the function

With the engine running:

Select the " Driving assistance " menu of the touch screen tablet.

Press this button for access to the " 360 vision " sub-menu.

"Rear camera".

The view selected is displayed in the instrument panel.

The display in the instrument panel disappears above 9 mph (15 km/h).

Deactivating the function

or

Accelerate so as to exceed 18 mph (30 km/h).

Select the " Driving assistance " menu of the touch screen tablet.

4

Press this button for access to the " 360 vision " sub-menu.

Select "Camera Off".

The image transmitted by the camera can be slightly affected by the presence of the very cold conditions screen.

With this menu displayed, select one of the three views:

"Front camera".

"360° camera".

Check the cleanliness of the camera lenses regularly.


When washing your vehicle, direct the lance at least 30 cm away from the camera.

193

194

Driving

Park Assist

This system provides active assistance with parking, detecting a parking space then controlling the steering to park in the space.

It controls the steering while the driver manages the accelerator, brakes, gears and clutch (manual gearbox). During phases of entry into and exit from a parking space, the system provides visual and audible information to the driver in order to make the manoeuvres safe. It may be necessary to move forwards and backwards more than once.

The Park Assist system provides assistance for the following manoeuvres:

- entry into a parallel parking space

The driver can take control at any time by gripping the steering wheel.

The Park Assist system cannot in any circumstances replace the care and responsibility of the driver.

The driver must remain in control of their vehicle ensuring that the space remains clear throughout the manoeuvre.

In some circumstances, the sensors may not detect small obstacles located in their blind spots.

The Park Assist system cannot work with the engine off.

- exiting from a parallel parking space

- bay parking

During a manoeuvre the steering wheel turns quickly: do not hold the steering wheel, do not place your hand between the spokes of the steering wheel and take care with loose and bulky clothing, scarves, handbags... There is a risk of injury.

When Park Assist is activated, it prevents a change to STOP mode of

Stop & Start. In STOP mode, activation of Park Assist restarts the engine.

The Park Assist system takes control of the power steering for a maximum of 4 manoeuvre cycles. The function is deactivated after these 4 cycles.

If you think that your vehicle is not positioned correctly, you should then take control of the steering to carry out the manoeuvre.

The sequence of manoeuvres and the driving instructions are displayed in the instrument panel.

The assistance is activated: the display of this symbol and a speed limit indicate that the steering manoeuvres are controlled by the system: do not touch the steering wheel.

The assistance is deactivated: the display of this symbol indicates that the steering manoeuvres are no longer controlled by the system: you must take control of the steering.

You should always check the surroundings of your vehicle before starting a manoeuvre.

Driving

The park sensors function is not available during parking space measurement. It intervenes later when manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle is approaching an obstacle: the audible signal becomes continuous when the obstacle is less than thirty centimetres away.

If you have deactivated the parking sensors, they are automatically reactivated during assisted parking manoeuvres.

4

Activation of Park Assist inhibits the blind spot monitoring function.

195

Driving

Operation

196

Assistance with parallel parking manoeuvres

When you have identified a parking space,

Press this control at the steering wheel, or

Select " Park Assist " in the

" Driving assistance " menu of the touch screen tablet to activate the function.

This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel to confirm activation of the function.

Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select " Enter parking slot " in the touch screen tablet.

To enter a parking space, the system does not identify spaces that are clearly smaller or larger than the vehicle.

Operate the direction indicator on the parking side chosen to activate the measurement function. You should drive at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the row of parked vehicles.

Drive slowly following the instructions until the system finds a free space.

Driving

Move forwards slowly until a message is displayed, accompanied by an audible signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.

The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress.

Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), move forwards and backwards, aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, until the indication of the end of the manoeuvre.

At the end of the manoeuvre, the operating indicator lamp goes out in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message and an audible signal.

The assistance is deactivated: you can take over control.

4

Select reverse, release the steering wheel and start moving without exceeding 5 mph

(8 km/h).

197

Driving

198

Assistance in exiting from a parallel parking space

When you want to leave a parallel parking space, start the engine.

With the vehicle stationary, press this control at the steering wheel, or


" " menu of the touch screen tablet to activate the function.

This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel to confirm the activation of the function.

Press on " Exit parking slot " in the touch screen tablet.

Operate the direction indicator for the exit side chosen.

Engage reverse or forward gear and release the steering wheel.

The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. Without exceeding 3 mph

(5 km/h), move forwards and backwards, aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, until the indication of the end of the manoeuvre.

The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's front wheels are clear of the parking space.

At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied by a message and an audible signal.


Driving

When several successive bays are found, the vehicle will be directed towards the last one.

Assistance with bay parking manoeuvres

Once you have identified a parking zone, press this control at the steering wheel,

or


" Driving assistance " menu of the touch screen tablet to activate the function.

This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel to confirm the activation of the function.

Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select " Start parking in a bay " on the touch screen tablet.

Operate the direction indicator on the parking side chosen to activate the measurement function. You should drive at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the row of parked vehicles.

the system finds a free space.

Move forwards slowly until a message is displayed, accompanied by an audible signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.

4

199

Driving

During a bay parking manoeuvre, the

Park Assist system is automatically deactivated once the rear of the vehicle is within 50 cm of an obstacle.

Select reverse, release the steering wheel and start moving without exceeding 5 mph

(8 km/h).

At the end of the manoeuvre, the operating indicator lamp goes out in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message and an audible signal.


During parking and exit from parking manoeuvres, the reversing camera function may come into operation. It facilitates monitoring of the surroundings of the vehicle, by displaying additional information in the instrument panel (see the corresponding section).

200

The assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress.

Without exceeding 5 mph (8 km/h), follow the instructions displayed in the instrument panel, aided by the warnings from the

"Parking sensors" system, until the indication of the end of the manoeuvre.

Driving

Deactivation

The system is deactivated automatically:

- on switching off the ignition,

- if the engine stalls,

- if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes of selection of the type of manoeuvre,

- after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during a manoeuvre,

- if the road wheel anti-spin regulation (ASR) is triggered,

- if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the stated limit,

- when the driver interrupts movement of the steering wheel,

- if the driver presses the Park Assist control.

- after 4 manoeuvre cycles,

- if one of the front wheels encounters an obstacle.

The operation indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel and a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal.

The driver should then take back control of the vehicle's steering.

Switching off

The system is switched off automatically:

- when towing a trailer,

- if the driver's door is opened,

- if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph

(70 km/h).

To switch the system of for a prolonged period, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Operating faults

In the event of a fault with the system, this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel and a message appears, accompanied by an audible signal.

The indicator lamp for the function flashes for a few seconds.

If the fault occurs during the use of the system, the indicator lamp goes off.

If the system is deactivated during a manoeuvre, the drive should reactivate it manually to repeat the measurement.

In the event of a fault with the power steering, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel accompanied by an alert message.


4

If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the space is too great, the system may not be able to measure the space.

Anything projecting beyond the envelope of the vehicle (long or wide load) is not taken into account by the Park Assist system during a manoeuvre.

In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered by road dirt, ice or snow.

In the event of a fault, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

201

202

Visibility

Exterior lighting controls

System for selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.

Main lighting

The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle are designed to adapt the driver's visibility progressively according to the climatic conditions:

- sidelamps, to be seen,

- dipped beam headlamps to see without dazzling other drivers,

- main beam headlamps to see clearly when the road is clear.

Additional lighting

Other lamps are provided to meet the requirements of particular driving conditions:

- directional headlamps for improved visibility when cornering,

- daytime running lamps to be more visible during the day,

- guide-me-home and welcome lighting to facilitate access to the vehicle,

- parking lamps as vehicle position markers.

Programming

The setting of some functions can be adjusted:

- automatic illumination of headlamps,

- guide-me-home lighting,

- cornering lighting,

- directional lighting.

In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.

In the event of the failure of one or more bulbs, a message advises you to check the lamp(s) in question.

Travelling abroad

Halogen headlamps

For motoring in countries that drive on the other side of the road, it is necessary to adapt the adjustment of the dipped beams so as to not dazzle the drivers of approaching vehicles.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop.

Xenon headlamps

The design of the dipped beam headlamps allows you to drive in a country that drives on the other side of the road, without the need for any modification.

Main lighting

Model without AUTO lighting

Model with AUTO lighting

Visibility

Selection of main lighting mode

Displays

Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the lighting selected is on.

Turn the ring A to place the desired symbol against the mark.

Lighting off / daytime running lamps.

Automatic illumination of headlamps.

Daytime running lamps / Dipped beam / Main beam.

Sidelamps.

Dipped headlamps or main beam headlamps.

Headlamp dipping

Pull the stalk B towards you to switch the lighting between dipped and main beam headlamps or to activate automatic headlamp dipping.

In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.

The rear sidelamps and direction indicators are located on the tailgate.

When they are on, opening the tailgate automatically transfers illumination to the lamps located in the rear bumper, to maintain the safety of the vehicle.

5

203

Visibility

204

Model with front and rear foglamps

Foglamps

The foglamps operate with the dipped and main beam headlamps.

Rear foglamps

When the headlamps switch off with automatic illumination of headlamps or when the dipped beam headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain on.

Turn the ring rearwards to switch off the foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.

To switch on the foglamps, turn the ring C forwards.

To switch off the foglamps, turn the ring C rearwards.

When switching off dipped beam manually, the rear foglamps also go off.

Front and rear foglamps

Rotate and release the ring :

forwards a first time to switch on the front foglamps,

forwards a second time to switch on the rear foglamps,

rearwards a first time to switch off the rear foglamps,

rearwards a second time to switch of the front fog lamps.

Visibility

Operation of the rear foglamps is inhibited with the tailgate open.

Opening the boot when these lamps are on causes them and their indicator lamp in the instrument panel to go off.

They do not come back on automatically when the boot is closed: they must be switched on again using the control stalk.

In good or rainy weather, by both day and night, the front foglamps and the rear foglamps are prohibited. In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers. They should only be used in fog or falling snow.

In these weather conditions, you should switch on the foglamps and dipped beam headlamps manually, as the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light.

Do not forget to switch off the front and rear foglamps when they are no longer necessary.

Switching off the lighting when switching off the ignition

When the ignition is switched off, all of the lamps switch off immediately, except for the dipped beam headlamps if automatic guideme-home lighting is activated.

Switching on the lighting when switching on the ignition

To reactivate the lighting control stalk, turn

A to position "0" - lighting off, then to the position of your choice.

If the lighting is switched on manually after switching off the ignition, there is an audible signal when a front door is opened to warn the driver that they have forgotten to switch off the vehicle's lighting, with the ignition off.

They switch off automatically after a period which depends on the state of charge of the battery (entry to energy economy mode).

5

205

Visibility

Manual guide-me-home lighting

206

Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of the sidelamps on the traffic side only.

Within one minute of switching off the ignition, operate the lighting control stalk up or down depending on the traffic side (for example: when parking on the left; lighting control stalk upwards; the right hand sidelamps are on).

This is confirmed by an audible signal and illumination of the corresponding direction indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel.

To switch off the parking lamps, return the lighting control stalk to the central position.

The temporary illumination of the dipped beam headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.

Switching on

With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps using the lighting stalk.

function off.

Switching off

The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.

Visibility

Automatic illumination of headlamps

Automatic "guide-mehome" lighting

Deactivation

Turn the ring to another position.

Deactivation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message.

When the automatic illumination of headlamps function is activated, under low ambient light the dipped beams headlamps come on automatically when the ignition is switched off.

When a low level of ambient light is detected by a sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.

As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

Activation

Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The activation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message.

Operating fault

In the event of a malfunction of the sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on, this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel accompanied by an audible signal and/or a message.


In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case, the lighting will not come on automatically.

Do not cover the sunshine sensor, coupled with the rain sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled.

Programming

Activation or deactivation, as well as the duration of the guide-me-home lighting, is set in the " " menu, then " Vehicle settings ".

5

207

208

Visibility

Automatic headlamp dipping

System which automatically changes between dipped and main beam according to the ambient light level and the driving conditions, using a camera located in the rear view mirror.

This automatic headlamp dipping system is a driving aid. The driver remains responsible for the vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the prevailing conditions of light, visibility and traffic and observation of driving and vehicle regulations.

The system will be operational as soon as you have exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h).

If the speed drops below 9 mph (15 km/h), the system no longer operates.

Visibility

Switching on

Put the lighting control stalk ring in the "AUTO" position.

In Driving assistanc e" menu, press the button, its indicator lamp comes on.

Flash the headlamps

(going beyond the point of resistance) to activate the function.

Operation

Once the function is activated, the system operates as follows:

If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or if the traffic conditions do not allow illumination of the main beam headlamps:

- dipped beam is maintained, this indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel.

If the ambient light level is very low and the traffic conditions permit:

- main beam comes on automatically: this indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel.

Pause

If the situation requires a change of headlamp beam, driver can take over at any time.

Flashing the headlamps again pauses the function and the system changes to

"automatic illumination of headlamps" mode:

- if the AUTO indicator lamp was on in green, the system changes to main beam,

- if the AUTO indicator lamp was on in blue, the system changes to dipped beam.

To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps again.

Depending on the situation, one of these two indicator lamps comes on.

Switching off

In the " Driving assistance " menu, press the button, its indicator lamp goes off and the the system changes to

"automatic illumination of headlamps" mode.

The system may suffer interference or not work correctly:

- under conditions of poor visibility

(for example, snowfall, heavy rain or thick fog, ...),

- if the windscreen is dirty, misted or obscured (by a sticker, ...) in front of the camera,

- if the vehicle is facing highly reflective signs.

5

The system is not able to detect:

- road users that do not have their own lighting, such as pedestrians,

- road users whose lighting is obscured, such as vehicles running behind a safety barrier (on a motorway, for example),

- road users at the top or bottom of a steep slope, on twisty roads, on crossroads.

209

Visibility

210

Daytime running lamps

(LEDs)

Door mirror spotlamps Exterior welcome lighting

The remote switching on of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is activated when the lighting control is in the " AUTO " position and the level of light detected by the sunshine sensor is low.

Switching on

Press the open padlock on the remote control or one of the front door handles with Keyless Entry and Starting.

The dipped beam headlamps and the sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also unlocked.

They come on automatically when the engine is started, when the lighting control stalk is in position " 0 " or " AUTO ".


To make your approach to the vehicle easier, these illuminate: passenger’s doors,

- the zones forward of the door mirrors and rearward of the front doors.

Switching on

The spotlamps come on automatically:

- when you use the remote control to locate the vehicle.

Switching off

They go off automatically after 30 seconds.

Switching off

The exterior welcome lighting switches off automatically after a set time, when the ignition is switched on or on locking the vehicle.

Programming

The activation, deactivation and choice of welcome lighting duration are done in the

" Driving assistance " menu then " Vehicle settings ".

Manual adjustment of headlamps

To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, the headlamps should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle.

0.

1 or 2 people in the front seats.

-.

Intermediate

1.

5 people + maximum authorised load.

-.

Intermediate

2.

Driver + maximum authorised load.

-.

Intermediate setting.

3.

5 people + maximum load in the boot.

The initial setting is position "0" .

Visibility

5

211

Visibility

Cornering lighting

212

With dipped or main beams, this system makes use of the beam from a front foglamp to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the vehicle speed is below 25 mph (approximately 40 km/h)

(urban driving, winding road, intersections, parking manoeuvres...).

with cornering lighting without cornering lighting

Switching on

This system starts:

- when the corresponding direction indicator is switched on, or

- from a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel.

Switching off

The system does not operate:

- below a certain angle of rotation of the steering wheel,

- when reverse gear is engaged.

The cornering lighting can be activated or deactivated in the " Driving assistance menu " menu, then " Vehicle settings ".

Directional lighting

on, this system allows the light beams to better follow the road.

The use of this system, coupled with the xenon headlamps and the cornering lighting, considerably improves the quality of your lighting round bends.

with directional lighting

Visibility

Operating fault

If a fault occurs, this warning lamp flashes in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message in the screen.


The directional lighting can be activated or deactivated via the " Driving aids " menu, then

" Vehicle settings ".

5

This system is inactive:

- when stationary or at low speeds,

- when reverse is engaged. without directional lighting

213

214

Visibility

Wiper controls

Programming

Your vehicle may also include some functions that can be configured:

- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,

Manual controls

The wipers are controlled directly by the driver.

Windscreen wipers

The front wiper system includes a safety device which can temporarily inhibit operation if it detects obstacles such as ice or snow.

In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or frost present on the windscreen, around the wiper arms and blades and the windscreen seal, before operating the wipers.

Do not operate the wipers on a dry windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not stuck to the windscreen, before operating the wipers.

Model without AUTO wiping

Model with AUTO wiping

Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower the stalk to the desired position.

Fast wipe (heavy rain).

Normal wipe (moderate rain).

Intermittent wipe (proportional to the speed of the vehicle).

Park.

Single wipe (press downwards or pull the stalk briefly towards you, then release).

or

Automatic wiping (press down, then release).

Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly towards you).

Rear wiper

Rear wiper selection ring:

park,

intermittent wipe,

wash-wipe (set duration).

If a significant accumulation of snow or ice is present, deactivate the automatic rear wiper via the " Driving assistance " menu, then " Vehicle settings ".

Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation if the windscreen wipers are operating.

This function can be deactivated in the

" Driving assistance " menu, then " Vehicle settings ".

Visibility

5

215

Visibility

Windscreen wash and headlamp wash

216

Screenwash and washer jets

Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards you. The windscreen wash then the windscreen wipers operate for a fixed period.

A few moments after releasing the wiper stalk, there is a last wipe to clear any runs from the screen.

Adjusting the jets

The front washers include an adjustment for the height of delivery from the jets.

If you want to modify the factory setting, turn the screw on each jet anti-clockwise, towards the "+" to raise the jet or clockwise, towards the

"-" to lower it.

Headlamp wash

The headlamps operate when the vehicle is moving and when the dipped beam headlamps are on. However, to reduce the consumption of screenwash fluid, the headlamp wash only operates with every 7th use of the screenwash or once every 25 miles (40 km), during a given journey.

Visibility

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers

The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.

5

Switching on

Briefly push the control stalk downwards.

A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has been accepted.

This warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.

Switching off

Briefly push the control stalk downwards again, or place the control stalk in another position

(Int, 1 or 2).

This warning lamp goes off in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.

The automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers must be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards, if the ignition has been off for more than one minute.

217

218

Visibility

Special position of the windscreen wipers

Operating fault

If a fault occurs with the automatic rain sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode.

Have it checked by CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the sunshine sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror.

Switch off the automatic rain sensitive wipers when using an automatic car wash.

In winter, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.

This position permits release of the windscreen wiper blades.

It is used for cleaning or replacement of the blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to detach the blades from the windscreen.

On switching off the ignition:

any action on the wiper stalk in the minute after switching off the ignition places the blades vertically on the screen.

When the system is no longer powered - at least one minute after switching off the ignition - it is possible to move the arms manually.

To park the blades again, switch on the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.

To maintain the effectiveness of the

"flat-blade" type of wiper blades, it is advisable to:

- handle them with care,

- clean them regularly using soapy water, cardboard on the windscreen,

- replace them at the first signs of wear.

Replacement of the arms must only be done by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Courtesy lamps

1. Front courtesy lamp

2. Front map reading lamp s

3. Rear courtesy lamp

4. Rear map reading lamp s

Visibility

Front - rear courtesy lamps

In this position, the courtesy lamp comes on gradually:

- when the vehicle is unlocked,

- when the electronic key is removed from the reader,

- when opening a door,

- when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate your vehicle.

It switches off gradually:

- when the vehicle is locked,

- when the ignition is switched on,

- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.

Front - rear map reading lamps

With the ignition on, press the corresponding switch.

Take care to avoid leaving anything in contact with the courtesy lamps.

Permanently off.

Permanent lighting.

Depending on version, you can also switch the courtesy lamp on or off by pressing this button.

With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time varies according to the circumstances:

- with the ignition off, approximately ten minutes, thirty seconds,

- with the engine running, unlimited.

5

219

220

Visibility

Panoramic sunroof

It is fitted with an electrically controlled blind.

Opening the roof blind Closing the roof blind

Rotate the control 0 to close the roof blind.

Anti-pinch

Rotate the control A to slide the roof blind to the desired position (positions 1 to 4 ).

The blind has an anti-pinch function.

At the end of its travel, when the blind encounters an obstacle on closing, it stops and moves back slightly.

Following a fault or after a battery disconnection during the movement of the blind or after it has stopped, you must re-initialise the anti-pinch function: place the blind in the closed position, press control knob B for approximately two seconds.

Interior mood lighting

The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.

Switching on

The interior mood lighting can be activated or deactivated via the " Driving assistance " menu, then " Vehicle settings ".

Footwell lighting

Visibility

At night, the lighting of the dashboard, centre console, courtesy lamp... come on automatically when the sidelamps are switched on.

The interior mood lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.

The soft lighting provided by the footwell lamps improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.

5

Activation

Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy lamps. The lamps come on when one of the doors is opened.

221

Safety

Direction indicators Hazard warning lamps Horn

222

Left: lower the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance.

Right: raise the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance.

A visual warning by means of the direction indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.

Press this button, the direction indicators flash.

They can operate with the ignition off.

Audible warning system to alert other road users to an imminent danger.

Press the central part of the steering wheel.

Three

fl

ashes of the direction indicators

Press briefly upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the direction indicators will flash

3 times.

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps

When braking in an emergency, depending on the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps come on automatically.

They switch off automatically the first time you accelerate.

You can also switch them off by pressing the button.

Use the horn moderately and only in the following circumstances:

- immediate danger,

- overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian

- approaching a location lacking visibility.

Safety

Emergency or assistance call

This system allows you to make an emergency or assistance call to the emergency services or to the dedicated CITROËN service.

For more information on the use of this function, refer to the "Audio and telematics" section.

Warning triangle

This safety device should be used in addition to the hazard warning lamps.

Its presence in the vehicle is mandatory.

Before leaving your vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on your high visibility vest.

Refer to the manufacturer's instructions on unfolding and installing supplied with the triangle.

6

Placing the triangle in the road

Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as required by the legislation in force in your country.

A location for stowing the warning triangle is provided in the tailgate interior trim.

223

224

Safety

Tyre under-in

fl

ation detection

System which automatically checks the pressure of the tyres while driving.

The system continuously monitors the pressures on the four tyres, once the vehicle is moving.

It compares the information given by the four wheel speed sensors with reference values, which must be reinitialised every time the tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed.

The system triggers an alert as soon as it detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or more tyres.

The under-inflation detection system does not replace the vigilance or the responsibility of the driver.

This system does not avoid the need to check the tyre pressures (including the spare wheel) every month as well as before a long journey.

Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs road holding, extends braking distances and causes premature tyre wear, particularly under arduous condition

(high loading, high speed, long journey).

The inflation pressures defined for your vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure label (see the "Identification markings" section).

Tyre pressures should be checked when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at moderate speeds).

Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures shown on the label.

Driving with under-inflated tyres increases fuel consumption.

Safety

Under-inflation alert

This is given by fixed illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and, depending on equipment, the display of a message.

Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive steering movements and sudden braking .

Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

or

In the event of a puncture, use the temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel (depending on equipment), in the temporary puncture repair kit, check the pressures of the four tyres when cold, or

if it is not possible to make this check immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed.

The loss of pressure detected does not always cause visible bulging of the tyre.

Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual check.

The alert is maintained until the system is reinitialised.

Reinitialisation

A label reminds you of the need to reinitialise the system every time one or more tyre pressure is adjusted, and after changing one or more wheels.

6

225

226

Safety

Before reinitialising the system, ensure that the pressures of the four tyres are correct for the use of the vehicle and in line with the recommendations on the tyre pressure label.

The under-inflation detection system does not give a warning if a pressure is incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.

Snow chains

The system does not have to be reinitialised after fitting or removing snow chains.

Operating fault

Reinitialisation of the system is done with the ignition on and the vehicle stationary.

From the secondary page of the " Driving assistance " menu:

Press " Under-inflation initialisation ".

Confirm the instruction by pressing " Yes ".

The new pressure settings registered are considered to be reference values by the system.

The flashing and then fixed illumination of the under-inflation warning lamp accompanied by illumination of the "service" warning lamp indicates a fault with the system.

In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the tyres is no longer assured.


Before doing anything to the system, the pressures of the four tyres must be checked and the system reinitialised.

The under-inflation alert can only be considered reliable if reinitialisation of the system is done with the the four tyre pressures correctly set.

Safety

Electronic stability programme (ESC)

Electronic Stability Programme (ESC:

Electronic Stability Control) incorporating the following systems:

- the anti-lock braking system (ABS) and the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),

- the emergency braking assistance,

- the anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction control,

Definitions

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)

This system improves the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking and provides improved control in corners, in particular on poor or slippery road surfaces.

The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of emergency braking.

The electronic brake force distribution system manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.

Anti-slip regulation (ASR)

The ASR system (also known as Traction

Control) optimises traction in order to avoid wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine. It also improves the directional stability of the vehicle on acceleration.

Emergency braking assistance

In an emergency, this system enables you to reach the optimum braking pressure more quickly and therefore reduce the stopping distance.

It is triggered according to the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in the effectiveness of the braking.

Dynamic stability control (DSC)

If there is a difference between the path followed by the vehicle and that required by the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and automatically acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle to the required path, within the limits of the laws of physics.

6

227

228

Safety

Intelligent traction control system ("Snow motion")

Your vehicle has a system to help driving on snow: intelligent traction control.

This system detects situations of difficult surface adhesion that could make it difficult to move off or make progress on deep fresh snow or compacted snow.

In these situations, the intelligent traction control limits the amount of wheel slip to provide the best traction and trajectory control for your vehicle.

In extremely severe conditions (deep snow, mud, ...), when it proves impossible to move off, it may be useful to temporarily deactivate the

ESP/ASR systems to allow the wheels to spin freely and so allow movement of the vehicle.

The use of snow tyres is strongly recommended on surfaces offering low levels of adhesion.

Operation

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)

When this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the ABS, which could cause loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

When this warning lamp comes on, coupled with the STOP warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the electronic brake force distribution

(EBFD), which could cause loss of control of the vehicle when braking.

You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

In both cases, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

When changing wheels (tyres and rims), make sure that these are approved for your vehicle.

Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake pedal.

In emergency braking, press very firmly without releasing the pressure.

Safety

Deactivation

In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the DSC system, so that the wheels can move freely and regain grip.

But it is recommended that the system be reactivated as soon as possible.

Press the button.


(DSC)

Activation

This system is activated automatically each time the vehicle is started.

It comes into operation in the event of a grip or trajectory problem.

This is indicated by flashing of this warning lamp in the instrument panel.

This warning lamp and the indicator lamp in the button come on: the

DSC system no longer acts on the operation of the engine.

Reactivation

The system is reactivated automatically each time the ignition is switched back on or from

30 mph (50 km/h).

Press the button again to reactivate it manually.

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, this indicates a fault with the system.

Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

The DSC system offers exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed.

The correct operation of the system depends on observation of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking components, the electronic components and the assembly and repair procedures used by CITROËN dealers.

After an impact, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

6

229

230

Safety

Seat belts

Front seat belts

The front seat belts are fitted with a pretensioning and force limiting system.

This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact.

Depending on the severity of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants.

The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on.

The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so improving their protection.

Seat belt reels with reversible pretension

This system provides automatic adjustment of the tension of the driver's and passenger's seat belts after fastening, once the vehicle's speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

In addition, as soon as the system detects a potentially dangerous driving situation, this system reacts by drawing in slack in the belt,

(for example, under heavy or sharp braking or sudden avoiding manoeuvres). By automatically increasing the tension of the seat belts, the system holds the driver and passenger against their seat backrests.

Once the driving situation returns to normal, the belt reel is released: the belt tension returns to the initial level of comfort.

Front seat belt anchorage height adjustment

To adjust the height of the anchorage point, squeeze the control and slide it up or down to the desired notch.

Deactivation of the passenger's airbag causes deactivation of the reversible seat belt reel on the passenger's side.

2

nd

row seat belts 2

nd

row outer seat belts

(stowing)

Safety

Fastening

Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.

Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.

Unfastening

Press the red button on the buckle.

Guide the seat belt as it reels in.

The rear seats are each fitted with a seat belt, three-point anchorages with inertia reel and force limiter (except for the centre rear seat).

Guide the belt as it reels in and place the tongue on the magnet at the side anchorage point.

6

231

Safety

2

nd

row centre seat belt

The seat belt for the centre rear seat is built into the roof.

3rd row seat belts

232

Fastening

Pull the strap and insert the tongue A into the right hand buckle.

Insert tongue B into the left hand buckle.

Check that each buckle is correctly fastened by pulling on the belt webbing.

Unfastening

Press the red button in buckle , then buckle A .

Guide the seat belt as it reels in and place the tongue B and then A on the magnet in the roof anchorage point.

Before any operation of the rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat belts check that there is no slack in the outer belts and secure their tongues on the anchorage points. The centre seat belt must be fully reeled in.

Fastening

Detach the seat belt strap from its retaining loop located on the side trim of the boot.

Pull on the strap and insert the tongue into the buckle.

Check that the buckle is correctly fastened by pulling on the belt strap.

Unfastening and stowing

Press the red button in buckle.

Guide the seat belt strap as it reels in.

Secure the strap, flat in the retaining loop.

Ensure that the the seat belts are secured when not in use.

Safety

Seat belt not fastened and unfastened alerts

Seat belts unfastened alert

The instrument panel includes a seat belt notfastened warning lamp A as well as an indicator of the location of the non-fastened belts B .

When the system detects a non-fastened or unfastened seat belt, the warning lamp A come on as well as the corresponding points in the indicator B .

At speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h), these alerts flash, accompanied by an audible signal for two minutes. After this period, these alerts remain on fixed, while the front seat belts are not fastened.

Front seat belts not fastened alert

Rear seat belts not fastened alert

On switching on the ignition, the warning lamp A remains on, as well as the corresponding points in the indicator B , if the driver and/or one or more passengers have not fastened their seat belt.

At speeds above 12 mph (20 km/h), these alerts flash, accompanied by a message and an audible signal for two minutes. After this period, these alerts remain on fixed, while the seat belts are not fastened.

6

On switching on the ignition, the warning lamp A comes on, as well as the corresponding points in the indicator B , if the driver and/or front passenger have not fastened their seat belt.

On switching on the ignition, engine running or the vehicle at a speed of up to 12 mph

(20 km/h), the warning lamp A as well as the corresponding points in the indicator B come on for about thirty seconds, if one or more rear passengers have not fastened their seat belt.

233

234

Safety

The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all restrained securely before setting off.

Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, always fasten your seat belt, even for short journeys.

Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as they will not fulfil their role fully.

The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strap to your size. The seat belt is stowed automatically when not in use.

Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly.

The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.

The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder.

The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling firmly on the strap and releasing it so that it reels in slightly.

In order to be effective, a seat belt must: possible, pulled front of you with a smooth movement, checking that it does not twist,

- be used to restrain only one person,

- not be converted or modified to avoid affecting its performance.

In accordance with current safety regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle, go to a qualified workshop with the skills and equipment needed, which a CITROËN dealer is able to provide.

Have your seat belts checked regularly by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop, particularly if the straps show signs of damage.

Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by

CITROËN dealers.

After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.

Recommendations for children

Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one and a half metres.

Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person.

Never allow a child to travel on your lap.

In the event of an impact

Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impact , the pretensioning device may be deployed before and independently of the airbags.

Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes on.

Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Safety

Airbags

System designed to maximise the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent collisions.

The airbags supplement the action of the forcelimiting seat belts (with the exception of the centre rear passenger).

If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones:

- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags are deployed instantly and contribute towards better protection of the occupants of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre passenger); immediately after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants,

- in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions, the airbags will not be deployed; the seat belt alone contributes towards ensuring your protection in these situations.

Impact detection zones

A.

Front impact zone.

B.

Side impact zone.

The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off.

This equipment will only deploy once.

If a second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not be deployed again.

Deployment of the airbag(s) is accompanied by a slight emission of smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system.

This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation.

The noise of the detonation may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.

6

235

Safety

236

Front airbags

To assure the safety of your child, the passenger's front airbag must be deactivated when you install a "rear facing" child seat on the front passenger seat.

Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious front impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax.

The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.

Deployment

The airbags are deployed, except the passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone A , in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle.

The front airbag inflates between the thorax and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, passenger's side to cushion their forward movement.

Deactivation

Only the passenger's front airbag can be deactivated.

With the ignition off , insert the key in the passenger airbag deactivation switch.

Turn it to the "OFF" position.

Remove the key keeping the switch in the new position.

When the ignition is on, this warning lamp comes in the instrument panel. It stays on while the airbag is deactivated.

Reactivation

When you remove the child seat, with the ignition off f , turn the switch to the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact.

When the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel for approximately one minute to signal that the front airbag is activated.

Safety

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible warning and a message, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

If this warning lamp flashes, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop. The passenger's front airbag may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

In the event of a fault, identified by at least one of the two airbag warning lamps, do not install a child seat or seat an adult on the front passenger seat.

Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop.

6

237

Safety

Lateral airbags

238

System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, between the hip and the shoulder.

Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest frame, door side.

Deployment

The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B , perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door trim panel.

Impact detection zones

A.

Front zone.

B.

Side impact zone.

Safety

Curtain airbags

System which protects the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head.

Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.

Deployment

The curtain airbag is deployed at the same time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B , perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle.

The curtain airbag inflates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.

Operating fault

If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.

In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be deployed.

In the event of a rear or front collision, the curtain airbag is not deployed.

6

239

240

Safety

For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:

Sit in a normal upright position.

Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.

Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object...). This could hamper the operation of the airbags or injure the occupants.

After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems checked.

All work on the airbag system must be carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.

Front airbags

Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel.

Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard.

If possible, do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe.

Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently.

Lateral airbags

Use only approved covers on the seats, compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact a CITROËN dealer.

Refer to the "Accessories" section.

Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backs (clothing...). This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed.

Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.

Curtain airbags

Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain airbag is deployed.

If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain airbags.

Safety

General points relating to child seats

Although one of CITROËN main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children also depends on you.

For maximum safety, please observe the following recommendations:

- in accordance with European regulations, all children under the age of 12 or less than one and a half metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight , on seats fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings * ,

statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats,

- a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the "rearwards-facing" position both in the front and in the rear.

CITROËN recommends that children should travel in the rear seats of your vehicle.

- "rearward-facing" up to the age of 3,

- "forward-facing" over the age of 3.

6

* The rules for carrying children are specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country.

241

Safety

Child seat in the front

242

"Rearward facing"

When a "rearward-facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat , adjust the vehicle seat to the midway longitudinal position, the lowest height position, backrest straightened. Then pull the height control lever

11 times.

The passenger's airbag must be deactivated.

Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed .

"Forward facing"

When a "rearward-facing" child seat is installed on the front passenger seat , adjust the vehicle seat to the midway longitudinal position, the lowest height position, backrest straightened. Then pull the height control lever

11 times. Leave the passenger's airbag active.

Passenger seat in the midway longitudinal position, the lowest height position, then the height control lever pulled 11 times.

Ensure that the seat belt is properly tightened.

For child seats with a stay, ensure that this is in firm and steady contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the passenger's seat.

Deactivating the passenger's airbag

Never install a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an active front airbag. This could cause the death of the child or serious injury.

The warning label present on both sides of the passenger's sun visor repeats this advice.

In line with current legislation, the following two pages contain this warning in all of the languages required.

Passenger airbag OFF

Safety

6

For information on deactivating the airbag, refer to the "Airbags" section.

243

244

Safety

AR

BG НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА . Това можеда причини СМЪРТ или

СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето .

CS NIKDY neumis ť jj ě tské zádržné za ř ízení orientované sm

SMRTI DÍT Ě TE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRAN Ě NÍ.

ě rem dozadu na sedadlo chrán ě né AKTIVOVANÝM č elním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí nebezpe č í

DA Brug aldrig en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde der er beskyttet af en aktiv airbag. Død eller alvorlig skade på barnet kan forekomme.

DE Verwenden Sie NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder Babyschale gegen die Fahrtrichtung bei AKTIVIERTEM Airbag, TOD oder ERNSTHAFTE

VERLETZUNGEN können die Folge sein.

EL Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου , σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ

αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ . Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ

EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur

ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA EL SISTEMA DE RETENCIÓN PARA NIÑOS DE ESPALDAS AL SENTIDO DE LA CIRCULACIÓN SOBRE UN ASIENTO

PROTEGIDO CON UN COJÍN INFLABLE FRONTAL ( AIRBAG ) ACTIVADO. ESTO PUEDE CAUSAR LA MUERTE DEL BEBE O HERIRLO

GRAVEMENTE.

ET Ärge kasutage kunagi lapse turvatooli seljaga sõidusuunas sõiduki istmel mis on kaitstud AKTIVEERITUD TURVAPADJAGA. See võib põhjustada lapsele

RASKEID VIGASTUSI või SURMA.

FI ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.

FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal ACTIVÉ.

Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT p j j č j j đ ima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zašti uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.

ć eno UKLJU Č ENIM prednjim ZRA Č NIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo

HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést olyan ülésen, amely AKTIVÁLT ÁLLAPOTÚ (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL van védve. Ez a gyermek halálát vagy súlyos sérülését okozhatja.

IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.

LT NIEKADA ne į renkite vaiko prilaikymo priemon ė s su atgal atgr ę žtu vaiku ant s ė dyn ė s, kuri saugoma VEIKIAN Č IOS priekin ė s ORO PAGALV Ė S.

Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali b ū ti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.

LV NAV PIE Ļ AUJAMS uzst ā d ī g ē rstu b ē rnu s ē dekl ī p

Tas var izrais ī t B Ē RNA N Ā VI vai rad ī t NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.

ē j ā pasažiera viet ā , kur ā ir AKTIVIZ Ē TS priekš ē jais DROŠ Ī BAS GAISA SPILVENS.

Safety

MT Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla

NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de airbag kan het

KIND ERNSTIG OF DODELIJK GEWOND raken.

NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE, BARNET risikerer

å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.

PL NIGDY nie instalowa ć fotelika dzieci ę g p y j y ł em do kierunku jazdy"na siedzeniu wyposa ż onym w CZO Ł OW Ą PODUSZK Ę POWIETRZN Ą w stanie AKTYWNYM.W przeciwnym razie dziecko nara ż one b ę dzie na Ś MIER Ć lub BARDZO POWA Ż NE OBRA Ż ENIA CIA Ł A w momenicie wyzwolenia poduszki powietrznej j j

PT NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada, num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.

RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal

ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.

RU ВО ВСЕХ

Ц

СЛУЧАЯХ

Щ

ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ

Д использовать обращенное

БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ , , у д д р д уд р этим д щ

.

устройство на

Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ сиденье , защищенном p j spôsobi ť SMR Ť , alebo VÁŽNE ZRANENIE DIE Ť A Ť A.

SL NIKOLI ne nameš č j g j , č j

Takšna namestitev lahko povzro č i SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.

SR NIKADA ne koristite de č je sedište koje se okre ć e unazad na sedištu zašti ć enim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu nastupiti

SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.

SV Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvänd barnstol i ett säte skyddat av en AKTIV AIRBAG framför det. Det kan orsaka ALLVARLIGA eller DÖDLIGA skador på barnet.

TR KES İ NLKLE HAVA YASTI Ğ I AKT İ F olan ön koltu ğ a yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltu ğ u yerle ş tirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCU Ğ UN ÖLMES İ NE veya ÇOK A Ğ IR

YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.

6

245

246

Safety

Child seat at the rear

"Rearward facing"

When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat , move the vehicle's front seat forwards and straighten the backrest so that the "rearward facing" child seat does not touch the vehicle's front seat.

"Forward facing"

When a "forward facing" child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat , move the vehicle's front seat forwards and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the "forward facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's front seat.

Seats in the 3

rd

row

When a child seat is installed on a 3 rd row passenger seat , move the 2 nd row seat forwards and straighten the backrest so that the child seat and the legs of the child do not touch the 2 nd row seat.

A child seat with a stay must never be installed on a 3 rd row passenger seat .

Child seats recommended by CITROËN

CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a :

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

L1

"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"

Installed in the rearwardsfacing position.

Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg

L2

"KIDDY Comfort Pro"

The impact shield must be used for carrying young children (from 9 to 18 kg).

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L4

"KLIPPAN Optima"

From approxmately 6 years (22 kg), the booster is used on its own.

L5

"RÖMER KIDFIX"

Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.

The child is restrained by the seat belt.

Safety

6

247

248

Safety

Installation of child seats secured using the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved ( a ) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.

Weight of the child / / indicative age

Seat

Groups 0 (b) and 0+

Birth to 13 kg

Group 1

From 9 to 18 kg

Group 2

From 15 to 25 kg

Group 3


1 st row

2 nd row

Front passenger seat ( c )

- fixed

- height adjustable

Fixed outer rear seats ( d )

Outer rear seats with longitudinal adjustment ( d ) ( e )

U

U(R)

U

U

U

U(R)

U

U

U

U(R)

U

U

U

U(R)

U

U

Centre rear seat ( d ) U U U U

Safety

( a ) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.

( b ) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat. When installed in the

2 nd row, they may prevent use of the other seats.

( c ) Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.

( d ) To install a child seat on a rear seat,

"rearward facing" or "forward facing", move the front seat forward, then straighten the backrest to allow enough space for the child seat and the child's legs.

( ) To install a child seat on a rear seat,

"rearward facing" or "forward facing", adjust the rear seat to the fully back position, with the backrest upright.

U : seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved "rearward facing" and/ or "forward facing", with the passenger seat adjusted to the midway longitudinal position.

U(R) : same as U , with the passenger's seat adjusted to the low position with

11 actions on the height control lever and in the midway longitudinal position.

Remove and stow the head restraint before installing a child seat on a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.

6

249

250

Safety

Installation of child seats secured using the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved ( a ) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.

Weight of the child / / indicative age

Seat

Groups 0 (b) and 0+

Birth to 13 kg

Group 1

From 9 to 18 kg

Group 2


Group 3


1 st row

2 nd row

Front passenger seat ( c )

- fixed

- height adjustable

Outer rear seats

Outer rear seats with longitudinal adjustment ( d ) ( e )

U

U(R)

U

U

U

U(R)

U

U

U

U(R)

U

U

U

U(R)

U

U

Centre rear seat ( d ) U U U U

3 rd row Outer rear seas U U U U

Safety

( a ) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.

( b ) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat or in the 3 rd row. When installed in the 2 nd row, they may prevent use of the other seats.

( c ) Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.

( d ) To install a child seat on a rear seat,

"rearward facing" or "forward facing", move the front seat forward, then straighten the backrest to allow enough space for the child seat and the child's legs.

( ) To install a child seat on a rear seat,

"rearward facing" or "forward facing", adjust the rear seat to the fully back position, with the backrest upright.

U : seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved "rear facing" and/or

"forward facing", with the passenger seat adjusted to the midway longitudinal position.

U(R) : same as U , with the passenger's seat adjusted to the low position with

11 actions on the height control lever and in the midway longitudinal position.


6

251

252

Safety

"ISOFIX" mountings

latest ISOFIX regulations .

The seats, represented below, are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings:

The ISOFIX mountings are three rings for each seat:

- two A , located between the vehicle seat back and cushion, indicated by a marking,

- a B , located under a cover on the back of the top of the seat backrest, referred to as the TOP TETHER for fixing the upper strap.

Its position is indicated by a marking.

Located on the back of the seat backrest, the top tether is used to secure the upper strap of child seats that have one. This device limits forward tipping of the child seat, in the event of a front impact.

This ISOFIX mounting system ensures fast, reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your vehicle.

The are fitted with two latches which are secured easily on the two rings A .

Some also have an (or top tether) which is attached to ring .

To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER :

- remove and stow the head restraint before installing the child seat on this seat (refit it after the child seat has been removed),

- remove the TOP TETHER cover by pulling at its cut-out, backrest, centred between the holes for the head restraint rods,

- secure the upper strap fixing to the ring B ,

- tighten the upper strap.

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

Observe strictly the fitting instructions provided with the child seat.

For information on the possibilities for fitting ISOFIX child seats to your vehicle, refer to the table of seating positions.

Safety

ISOFIX child seats recommended by CITROËN and approved for your vehicle

"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its Baby-Safe Plus ISOFIX base" (size category: E )

Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings .

The base has a stay, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor.

This seat can be secured with a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and attached to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.

Baby P2C Midi and its ISOFIX base (size categories: D, C, A, B, B1 )

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A

The base has a stay, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor.

This child seat can also be used "forward facing".

This seat can not be secured with a seat belt.

We recommend that you use the seat in the "rearward facing" position up to the age of 3 years.

6

253

Safety

Locations for installing ISOFIX child seats

In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings.

In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G , is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

Type of ISOFIX child seat

ISOFIX size category

Front passenger seat

Outer rear seats, fixed

Outer rear seats, adjustable longitudinally

Centre rear seat

Less than 10 kg

(group 0)

Up to approx.

6 months

Sleeper cot

F G

*

Weight of the child / indicative age

Less than 10 kg

(group 0)

Less than 13 kg

(group 0+)

Up to approx. 1 year

From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)

From approx. 1 to 3 years

"rearwards-facing" "rearwards-facing" "forwards-facing"

C D D A B E C

Not ISOFIX

B1

IL-SU ** IL-SU

IL-SU ** IL-SU

X IL-SU

IL-SU

IL-SU

IL-SU

X

IUF / IL-SU

(1)

IUF / IL-SU

IUF / IL-SU

IUF / IL-SU IUF / IL-SU

254

* Sleeper cots cannot be fitted to the front passenger's seat.

** The ISOFIX sleeper cot, secured to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies the full width of the rear seats.

Safety

IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an

ISOFIX U niversal seat, " F orwards-facing" secured using the top strap to the top tether on ISOFIX seats.

IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an

I sofix emi- U niversal seat either:

- "rearwards-facing" fitted with a top belt or a stay,

- "forwards-facing" fitted with a stay,

- a sleeper cot fitted with an upper strap or a stay.

For advice on securing of the top belt, refer to the "Isofix Mountings" section.

X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat or sleeper cot for the weight group indicated.

(1) : The outer seat in row 2 must be adjusted to 3 notches back from the fully forward position.


6

255

Safety

Locations for installing ISOFIX child seats

mountings.

In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G , is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.

Weight of the child / indicative age

Less than 10 kg

(group 0)

Up to approx.

6 months

Less than 10 kg

(group 0)

Less than 13 kg

(group 0+)

Up to approx. 1 year

From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)

From approx. 1 to 3 years

Type of ISOFIX child seat Sleeper cot * "rearwards-facing" "rearwards-facing" "forwards-facing"

F G C D D A B B1 ISOFIX size category

Front passenger seat

Outer rear seats, fixed

Outer rear seats, adjustable longitudinally

Centre rear seat

Rear seat in the 3 rd row

IL-SU ** IL-SU

IL-SU ** IL-SU

X IL-SU

E C

Not ISOFIX

Not ISOFIX

IL-SU

IL-SU

IL-SU




256

* Sleeper cots cannot be fitted to the front passenger's seat.

** The ISOFIX sleeper cot, secured to the lower rings of an ISOFIX seat, occupies the full width of the rear seats.

Safety

IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an

ISOFIX U niversal seat, " F orwards-facing" secured using the top strap to the top tether on ISOFIX seats.

IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an

I sofix emi- U niversal seat either:

- "rearwards-facing" fitted with a top belt or a stay,

- "forwards-facing" fitted with a stay,

- a sleeper cot fitted with an upper strap or a stay.

For advice on securing of the top belt, refer to the "Isofix Mountings" section.

X: seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat or sleeper cot for the weight group indicated.

(1) : The outer seat in row 2 must be adjusted to 3 notches back from the fully forward position.


6

257

258

Safety

Advice on child seats

The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident.

Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses keeping the slack in relation to the child's body to a minimum , even for short journeys.

For optimum installation of the "forward facing" child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat is as close as possible to the backrest of the vehicle's seat, or in contact if possible

The head restraint must be removed before installing a child seat with a backrest on the passenger seat.

Ensure that the head restraint is stowed or attached securely so that it is not thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking.

Refit the head restraint as soon as the child seat is removed.

Children at the front

The legislation on carrying a child on the front passenger seat is specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country.

Deactivate the passenger's airbag when a

"rearward facing" child seat is installed on the front seat. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.

As a safety precaution, do not leave:

- one or more children alone and unsupervised in a vehicle,

- a child or an animal in a vehicle which is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, the vehicle.

To prevent accidental opening of the doors, use the "Child lock".

Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third.

To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.

Installing a booster cushion

The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck.

Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs.

CITROËN recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level.

Manual child lock

This mechanical system prevents opening of the rear door using its interior control.

The control is located on the edge of each rear door.

Locking

Using the integral ignition key, turn the control as far as it will go:

- to the left on the left-hand rear door,

- to the right on the right-hand rear door.

Unlocking

Using the integral ignition key, turn the control as far as it will go:

- to the right on the left-hand rear door,

- to the left on the right-hand rear door.

Safety

6

259

260



Complete system consisting of a compressor and a sealant cartridge which permits temporary repair of a tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage.

It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder.

Access to the kit

This kit is installed in the storage box, under the boot floor.

Depending on version, the kit is stowed under the front passenger's seat or in the storage box under the second row footwell.

List of tools

All of these tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to equipment. Do not use them for other purposes.

1.

12 V compressor.

Contains a sealant cartridge for the temporary repair of a tyre and can also be used for adjusting tyre pressures.

2.

Chocks * to immobilise the wheels of the vehicle.

3.

Bolt cover removal tool * .

For removing the wheel bolt finishers

(covers) on alloy wheels.

4.

Removable

See the "Towing the vehicle" section.



7

261


Description of the kit

262

The tyre inflation pressures are given on this label.

A.

"Sealant" or "Air" position selector.

B.

On "I" / off switch.

C.

Deflation button.

D.

Pressure gauge (in bar and p.s.i.).

E.

Compartment housing:

- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,

- various inflation adaptors for accessories, such as balls, bicycle tyres...

F.

Sealant cartridge.

G.

White pipe with cap for repair.

H.

Black for inflation.

I.

Speed limit sticker.

The speed limit sticker I must be affixed to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired using this type of kit.


Repair procedure

1. Sealing

Switch off the ignition.

Turn the selector A to the "sealant" position.

Check that the switch B is in position "O" .

Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre.

Uncoil the white pipe G fully.

Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.

Connect the white pipe to the valve of the tyre to be repaired.

Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.

Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.

7

Take care, this product is harmful

(e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes.

Keep this product out of the reach of children.

Do not start the compressor before connecting the white pipe to the tyre valve: the sealant product would be expelled through the pipe.

263


264

Switch on the compressor by moving the switch B to position "I" until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars.

The sealant is injected into the tyre under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of splashing).

Remove the kit and screw the cap back on the white pipe.

Take care to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.

three miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed (between 15 and 35 mph (20 and

60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.

Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit.

If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure is not attained, this indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.

Tyre under-in

fl

ation detection

After repair of the tyre, the warning lamp will remain on until the system is reinitialised.

For more information, refer to the

"Under-inflation detection" section.


2. In

fl

ation

Turn the selector A to the "air" position.

Uncoil the black pipe fully.

Connect the black pipe to the valve of the wheel.

Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.

Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.

As soon as possible, go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

You must inform the technician that you have used this kit. After inspection, the technician will advise you on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must be replaced.

Adjust the pressure using the compressor

(to inflate: switch B in position "I" ; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button ), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the left hand door aperture).

7 puncture has not been fully plugged; contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop for assistance.

Remove and stow the kit.

Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h] max) limiting the distance travelled to approximately 120 miles (200 km).

265


266

Stow the black pipe.

Detach the angled base from the white pipe.

Support the compressor vertically.

Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.

Beware of discharges of fluid.

The expiry date of the fluid is indicated on the cartridge.

The sealant cartridge is designed for single use; even if only partly used, it must be replaced.

After use, do not discard the cartridge into the environment, take it to an authorised waste disposal site or a

CITROËN dealer.

Do not forget to obtain a new sealant cartridge, available from CITROËN dealers or from a qualified workshop.


Checking tyre pressures / inflating accessories

You can also use the compressor, without injecting any product, to:

- check or adjust the pressure of your tyres,

- inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle tyres...).

Turn the selector A to the "Air" position.

Uncoil the black pipe fully.

Connect the black pipe to the valve of the wheel or accessory.

If necessary, fit one of the adaptors supplied with the kit first.

Connect the compressor's electrical connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.

Start the vehicle and let the engine run.

Adjust the pressure using the compressor

(to inflate: switch B in position "I" ; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button C ), according to the vehicle's tyre pressure label or the accessory's pressure label.

Remove the kit then stow it.

Should the pressure of one or more tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise the tyre pressures (see the

"Under-inflation detection" section). 7

267

268


Changing a wheel

Procedure for changing a faulty wheel for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.

Access to the tools

The tools are installed in the boot under the floor.

Remove the boot carpet for access to them.

List of tools *

All of these tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to the level of equipment. Do not use them for other purposes.

1.

Wheelbrace.

the wheel bolts.

2.

Chocks for immobilising the vehicle (except versions with manual gearbox).

3.

Jack with integral handle.

For raising the vehicle.

4.

Wheel bolt cover removal tool.

For removing the finishers on the heads of the wheel bolts on alloy wheels.

5.

Socket for the security bolts (located in the glove box).

"security" bolts.

* According to equipment.


Access to the spare wheel

The spare wheel is located in the boot under the floor.

For access to the spare wheel, refer to the

"Access to the tools" section.

Taking out the wheel

Unscrew the central green screw.

Lift the spare wheel towards you from the rear.

Remove the wheel from the boot.

Putting the spare wheel back in place

Return the wheel to its housing.

Unscrew the central screw a few turns, then put it in place in the middle of the wheel.

Fully tighten the central screw to secure the wheel correctly.

Return the box to its position in the middle of the wheel.

7

As the spare wheel is narrower than the wheels on the vehicle, in the event of a puncture, the punctured wheel must be carried in the boot.

269

270


Changing a wheel

Procedure for changing a wheel with a punctured tyre by the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.

Access to the vehicle's tools *

2.

Wheel chocks for immobilising the vehicle

(except versions with manual gearbox).

3.

Jack with integral handle.

4.

Wheel bolt head cover removal tool.

on alloy wheels.

5.

Socket for the security bolts (stowed in the glove box).

For adapting the wheelbrace to the special security bolts.

6.

Wheelbrace extension.

carrier drive.

7.

Towing eye.

Some of the tools are accessible from inside the boot. The wheel chocks 2 as well as the wheelbrace extension 6 are stowed under the right hand boot sill.

The wheelbrace 1 and the towing eye 7 are stowed under the left hand boot sill.

The other tools, the jack 3 and the tool for removing the wheel bolt head finishers for alloy wheels 4 , are stowed in a box attached to the spare wheel. The assembly is secured under the vehicle in a carrier. See the "Access to the spare wheel" section).

Wheel with trim

When removing the wheel , detach the trim first using the wheelbrace 1 pulling at the valve passage hole.

When refitting the wheel , refit the trim starting by placing its notch facing the valve and press around its edge with the palm of your hand.

* Depending on version. The complete tooling is with the spare wheel.

List of tools *

All of these tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to equipment. Do not use them for other purposes.

1.

Wheelbrace.

For removing the wheel trim and the wheel fixing bolts.


Access to the spare wheel *

The spare wheel is supported by a carrier underneath the vehicle.

Only a "space-saver" type of spare wheel can be fitted under the vehicle.

Taking out the spare wheel

Fold the concertina board and put the left hand third row seat into position (if your vehicle has them). expose the nut for operating the spare wheel carrier.

Using the extension 6 fitted to the end of the wheelbrace, turn the nut clockwise to unwind the carrier cable until the spare wheel reaches the ground. Unwind the length needed for access to the wheel.

Detach the wheel/box assembly from the rear of the vehicle.

Remove the hook with its connection plate to release the wheel/box assembly, as shown in the illustration.

Pull out the wheel to gain access to the box.

7

* Depending on version.

271

272


Press the tongue, slide the box cover to the centre and remove it for access to the other tools (jack and wheel bolt head finisher removal tool for alloy wheels).

Stowing the tools

Return the tools to the box and stow the box in the vehicle's boot.

Wind in the carrier by turning the wheelbrace clockwise: once the cable is fully wound in you should no longer feel any resistance.

Stow the other tools in the locations provided in the boot.

A puncture wheel from the vehicle cannot be fitted under the vehicle. It must be carried in the boot. Use a cover to protect the boot.

Putting the spare wheel back in place

Stow the corresponding tools in the box and close the cover.

Position the tool box on the ground.


Position the spare wheel on the box so that the positioning indicator will be introduced into the bolt hole in the middle of the box.

Pass the hook with its connection plate into the wheel then the box, as illustrated.

Raise the wheel/box assembly underneath the vehicle by turning the carrier drive nut anticlockwise using the wheelbrace and the extension.

Tighten fully. When the cable is fully wound in, rotation of the nut no longer presents any resistance.

Check that the wheel is horizontally flat against the floor.

7

273


Parking the vehicle

Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traffic: the ground must be level, stable and not slippery.

Apply the parking brake unless it has been programmed to automatic mode, switch off the ignition and engage first gear * to block the wheels.

Check that the braking warning lamp and the warning lamp in the parking brake control lever come on.

For greater safety, place a chock 2 against the wheel opposite to the one being changed.

The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe.

Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack; use an axle stand.

List of operations

the 4 (depending on equipment).

Fit the security socket on the wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt (if fitted).

Slacken the other bolts (no more than a 1/4 turn) using the wheelbrace 1 only.

274

* Position R for an electronic gearbox or P for an automatic gearbox.


Place the jack in contact with one of the two front or rear B locations provided on the underbody, whichever is closest to the wheel to be changed.

Extend the jack until its base plate is in contact with the ground. Ensure that the centreline of the jack base plate is directly below the location A or B used.

Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.

Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place.

Remove the wheel.

7

275

276


Fitting a wheel

Fitting the "space-saver" spare wheel

If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, when tightening the bolts on fitting, it is normal to notice that the washers do not come into contact with the

"space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the conical surface of each bolt.

After changing a wheel

To correctly store the punctured wheel in the boot ( not in the location of the space-saver wheel ), first remove the central cover.

When using the "space-saver" type spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph

(80 km/h).

Have the tightening of the bolts and the pressure of the spare wheel checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.

Have the punctured wheel repaired and refitted to the vehicle as soon as possible.

List of operations

Put the wheel in place on the hub.

Screw in the bolts fully by hand.

Pre-tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 5 (depending on equipment).

Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.


Lower the vehicle fully.

Fold the jack 3 and detach it.

Tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 5 (depending on equipment).

Tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.

Refit the bolt covers on each of the bolts or the hub cap (depending on equipment).

Store the tools in the box.

The tyre inflation pressures are given on this label.

7

277

278


Snow chains

In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.

The snow chains must be fitted only to the front wheels. They must never be fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels.

Use only chains designed to be fitted the type of wheel on your vehicle:

Original tyre size

Specification of chains.

205/60 R16

205/55 R17

Maximum link size:

9 mm

225/45 R18

THULE model

K-Summit K34 only

Advice on installation

If you have to fit the chains during a journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road.

Apply the parking brake and position any wheel chocks to prevent movement of your vehicle.

Fit the chains following the instructions provided by the manufacturer.

Move off gently and drive for a few moments, without exceeding 30 mph

(50 km/h).

Stop your vehicle and check that the snow chains are correctly tightened.

For more information on snow chains, contact a

CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Take account of the legislation in force in your country on the use of snow chains and the maximum running speed authorised.

Avoid driving on roads that have been cleared of snow, to avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and the road surface. It is recommended that before you leave, you practise fitting the snow chains on a level and dry surface. If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.


Changing a bulb

Front lamps

Risk of electrocution

Xenon bulbs (D5S-25W) must be replaced by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Model with xenon headlamps

1. Directional dipped beam headlamps

(D5S-25W).

2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).

3. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps

(6 light emitting diodes - LEDs).

4. Direction indicators


5. Front foglamps (H11-55W).

For H7 type bulbs with lugs... take care to observe their correct installation so as to ensure the best lighting performance.


7

Model with halogen headlamps

1. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).

2. Main beam headlamps (H7-55W).

3. Daytime running lamps/sidelamps


4.

Direction indicators (PWY24W).

5. Foglamps (H11-55W).

Changing the light emitting diode-LED lamps

For replacement, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop.

279

280


The headlamps are fitted with polycarbonate glass with a protective coating: do not clean them using a dry or abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent or solvent product, use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product, when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals.

Changing a bulb should only be done after the headlamp has been switched off for a few minutes (risk of serious burns).

Do not touch the bulb directly with your fingers, use a lint-free cloth.

It is imperative to use only antiultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid damaging the headlamp.

Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification.

Directional dipped beam headlamps (xenon model)

D5S xenon bulbs must be changed by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop, as there is a risk of electrocution.

In the event of failure of one of the D5S bulbs, it is recommended that the bulb on the other side be changed at the same time.

Main beam headlamps (xenon model)

Remove the protective plastic cover by pulling the tab.

Push the connector.

Remove the bulb and change it.

For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.


Dipped beam headlamps

(halogen model)

Turn the protective plastic cover to remove it.

Disconnect the connector.

Release the clips.



Main beam headlamps

(halogen model)

Remove the protective plastic cover by pulling the tab.

Push the connector.



Daytime running lamps / sidelamps

For the replacement of this type of LED lamp and lighting guides, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from

CITROËN dealers.

7

281


282

Direction indicators

Faster flashing of a direction indicator warning lamp (left or right) indicates a failed bulb on that side.

Direction indicators (light emitting diodes - LED)

For the replacement of this type of lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

The direction indicator bulb is located below the front lamp.

Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn anticlockwise.

Remove the bulb holder.

Change the failed bulb.


Front foglamps

Unclip the finisher by pulling at the top.

Remove the two screws to remove the unit.

Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn.

Remove the bulb holder.

Change the failed bulb.

For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order, pressing on the finisher to refit it.


Door mirror spotlamps Rear lamps

2. Sidelamp foglamp (P21/5W).

You should contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of the light emitting diode - LED.

Integrated direction indicator side repeaters

You should contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of these bulbs.

Model with LED lamps

3. Brake lamp / sidelamp (light emitting diodes-LED).

4. Reversing lamp (W16W).

Model with conventional bulb lamps

3. Brake lamp / sidelamp (P21/5W).

4. Reversing lamp (W16W).

Changing the light emitting diode-LED lamps

For replacement, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop.

7

283


284

Lamps on the tailgate

Identify the failed bulb.

Open the boot.

Remove the access cover.

Remove the three lamp fixing screws A .

Disconnect the lamp connector.

Carefully remove the lamp from the outside by pressing the retaining clip B .



Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise and pull the bulb out.

Change the bulb.



Rear lamps

2. Sidelamp / foglamp (P21/5W).


6. Reversing lamp (light emitting diodes-LED).


4. Brake lamp / sidelamp (P21/5W).

6. Reversing lamp (P21W).

7

285


286

Lamps on the tailgate

Identify the failed bulb.

Open the boot.

Remove the access cover.

Remove the three lamp fixing screws A .

Carefully remove the lamp from its housing.

Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn anti-clockwise and pull the bulb out.

Change the bulb.





Direction indicator, sidelamp and foglamp

Access is by passing a hand under the bumper.

Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and pull it out.

Change the bulb.

For reassembly carry out these operations in reverse order.

You can also contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of these bulbs.

Third brake lamp (light emitting diodes-LED)

For the replacement of this type of lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Number plate lamps (W5W)

Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cutouts in the the lens.

Push it outwards to unclip it.

Remove the lens.

Change the faulty bulb.

To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.

7

287

288


Changing a fuse

Access to the tools Changing a fuse

Before changing a fuse:

the cause of the failure must be identified and rectified,

all electrical consumers must b switched off,

the vehicle must be immobilised with the ignition off,

identify the failed fuse using the tables and layout drawings in the following pages.

The extraction tweezer is located in the dashboard fusebox compartment.

For access to it: unclip the cover by pulling at the top right, then left, disengage the cover completely, by carefully pulling in the direction indicated by the arrow, remove the tweezer.

To replace a fuse, you must:

use the special tweezer to extract the fuse from its housing and check the condition of its filament.

always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of the same rating (same colour); using a different rating could cause faults (risk of fire).

If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, have the vehicle's electrical system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Good

Tweezer

Failed

The replacement of a fuse not shown in the tables below may cause a serious malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.


Configurations

Installing electrical accessories

Your vehicle's electrical system is designed to operate with standard or optional equipment.

Before installing other electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

CITROËN will not accept responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by CITROËN and not installed in accordance with its instructions, in particular when the combined consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.

The type of electrical system of the vehicle depends on its level of equipment.

To identify the type of electrical system on your vehicle, open the bonnet: the presence of an additional fusebox in front of the battery indicates that it is type 2.

The type 1 electrical system does not have any fuses in front of the battery.

7

289


290

Dashboard fuses

The fusebox is located in the lower dashboard

(left-hand side).

Access to the fuses

Refer to the paragraph "Access to the tools".

Type 1 fuse tables

Fusebox 1

Fuse N°

F8

Rating

5 A

F18

F26

F20

F21

F19

F12

F2

F16

F15

F28

F30

F27

20 A

15 A

5 A

5 A

5 A

5 A

5 A

15 A

15 A

5 A

15 A

15 A

Functions

Steering mounted controls

Touch screen tablet, audio and navigation system, CD player,

USB ports and auxiliary sockets.

Front 12V socket.

Boot 12V socket.

START/STOP button.

Rear wiper.

Front screenwash pump, rear screenwash pump.

Horn.

Airbags.

Instrument panel.

Rain and sunshine sensor.

Keyless starting unit.

Manual headlamp adjustment control.

Fusebox 2

Fuse N°

F9

Rating

15 A Rear 12V socket.

Functions


7

291

292


Type 2 fuse tables

Fuse N°

F3

F6 A

F34

F13

F14

F16

F27

F30

F38

F24

F25

F33

F8

F9

F19

Rating

3 A

15 A

5 A

10 A

10 A

3 A

5 A

20 A

3 A

3 A

5 A

3 A

5 A

3 A

5 A

Functions

START/STOP button.

Touch screen tablet, audio and navigation system, CD player,

USB ports and auxiliary sockets.

Alarm.

Steering mounted controls.

Instrument panel.

Rain and sunshine sensor.

Airbags.

Memorisation of driving position.

Electric power steering.

Front 12V socket.

Boot 12V socket.

Map reading lamps in row 1 courtesy lamps.

Electronic gearbox gear selector.

Rear wiper.

Manual headlamp adjustment control.

Engine compartment fuses

The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery (left-hand side).

Access to the fuses

Unclip the cover, by pushing the two red latches towards the rear of the vehicle.

Change the fuse (see corresponding paragraph). carefully to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.

An additional fusebox is fitted in front of the battery, for type 2.


7

293

294


Type 1 fuse table

Fuse N°

F18

F19

Rating

10 A

10 A

Right hand main beam

Left hand main beam.

Functions

Type 2 fuse table

Fusebox 1

Fuse N° Rating

F9

F18

F21

30 A

25 A

3 A

Fusebox 2

Fuse N°

F19

F20

F21

Rating

30 A

15 A

20 A

Functions

Motorised tailgate.

Hi-Fi amplifier.

Hands-free starting reader unit.

Functions

Front wiper slow / fast speed.

Front and rear screenwash pump.

Headlamp wash pump.


12 V battery

Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.

Access to the battery

The presence of this label, in particular with the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and specification; the involvement of a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop is essential when replacing or disconnecting the battery.

After refitting the battery, the Stop &

Start system will only be active after a continuous period of immobilisation of the vehicle, a period which depends on the climatic conditions and the state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours).

The battery is located under the bonnet.

For access to the (+) terminal: release the bonnet using the interior lever, then the exterior safety catch, raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay, lift the plastic cover for access to the (+) terminal.

Before doing any work

Immobilise the vehicle: apply the parking brake, put the gearbox in neutral, then switch off the ignition.

Check that all electrical equipment is switched off.

Starting using another battery

When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be started using a slave battery

(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead cables.

First check that the slave battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity at least equal to that of the discharged battery.

Do not try to start the engine by connecting a battery charger.

Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when the engine is running.

Connect the red cable to the positive terminal (+) of the flat battery A , then to the positive terminal (+) of the slave battery .

Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery B (or earth point on the other vehicle).

Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C on the broken down vehicle (or on the engine mounting).

Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery and leave it running for a few minutes.

7

295


296

Before disconnecting the battery

Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition before disconnecting the battery.

Close the windows and the doors before disconnecting the battery.

Operate the starter on the broken down vehicle and let the engine run

If the engine does not start straight away, switch off the ignition and wait a few moments before trying again.

Wait until the engine returns to idle then disconnect the jump lead cables in the reverse order.

Following reconnection of the battery

Following reconnection of the battery, switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to permit initialisation of the electronic systems.

However, if problems remain following this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise (depending on version):

- the remote control key,

- the electric blind(s),

- ...

Disconnecting the (+) cable

Raise the locking tab D fully to release the cable terminal clamp E .

Reconnecting the (+) cable

Position the open clamp E of the cable on the positive post (+) of the battery.

Press vertically on the clamp E to position it correctly on the battery.

Lock the clamp by spreading the positioning lug and then lowering the tab D .

Do not apply excessive force on the tab as locking will not be possible if the clamp is not positioned correctly; start the procedure again.


Charging the battery using a battery charger

The Stop & Start battery does not have to be disconnected for charging.

Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.

Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger.

Connect the battery starting with the negative terminal (-).

Check that the terminals and connectors are clean. If they are covered with sulphate

(whitish or greenish deposit), remove them and clean them.

The batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must not, in any circumstances, be discarded with household waste.

Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point.

It is advisable to disconnect the battery if the vehicle is to be left unused for more than one month.

Protect your eyes and face before handling the battery.

All operations on the battery must be carried out in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion or fire.

Do not try to charge a frozen battery; the battery must first be thawed out to avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery has been frozen, before charging have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop who will check that the internal components have not been damaged and the casing is not cracked, which could cause a leak of toxic and corrosive acid.

Do not reverse the polarity and use only a 12 V charger.

Do not disconnect the terminals while the engine is running.

Do not charge the batteries without disconnecting the terminals first.

Wash your hands afterwards.

Do not push the vehicle to start the engine if you have an electronic gearbox or automatic gearbox.

7

297

298


Load reduction mode

System which manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery.

When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as the air conditioning, the heated rear screen...

The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.

Energy economy mode

System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of charge in the battery.

After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum combined duration of about forty minutes.

Switching to economy mode

A message then appears in the instrument panel screen indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby.

If a telephone call is being made at this time, it will be maintained for around 10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system.

Exiting economy mode

These functions are reactivated automatically next time the vehicle is driven.

In order to restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run:

- for less than ten minutes, to use the equipment for approximately five minutes,

- for more than ten minutes, to use the equipment for up to approximately thirty minutes.

Let the engine run for the duration specified to ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.

Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the engine in order to charge the battery.

A flat battery prevents the engine from starting

(refer to the "Battery" section).



Before removing a front wiper blade

Within one minute after switching off the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to position the wiper blades vertically on the windscreen, or

From one minute after switching off the ignition, reposition the arms manually.

Removing

Raise the corresponding wiper arm.

Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.

Fitting

Put the corresponding new wiper blade in place and clip it.

Fold down the wiper arm carefully.

After fitting a front wiper blade

Switch on the ignition.

Operate the wiper stalk again to park the wiper blades.

Replacement of the arms must be done by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

7

299

300


Towing the vehicle

Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using the towing eye.

Access to the tools

The towing eye is installed in the boot under the floor.

To gain access to it: open the boot, lift the floor and remove it, remove the towing eye from its housing.

General recommendations

Observe the legislation in force in your country.

Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle.

The person at the wheel of the towed vehicle must have a valid driving licence.

When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing bar; rope and straps are prohibited.

When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering.

In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service:

- vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road,

- 4 wheel drive vehicle,

- when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake,

- towing with only two wheels on the ground,

- where there is no approved towing bar available...


Towing your vehicle

On the front bumper, unclip the cover by pressing on the left.

Screw the towing eye in fully.

Install the towing bar.

Towing another vehicle

Place the gear lever in neutral

(position N on an electronic or automatic gearbox).

Failure to observe this instruction could result in damage to certain components (braking, transmission...) and the absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.

Unlock the steering by turning the key in the ignition one notch and release the parking brake.

Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles. distance.

On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by pressing at the bottom.

Screw the towing eye in fully.

Install the towing bar.

Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both vehicles.

distance.

7

301


Towing a trailer

302

Towbar suitable for the attachment of a trailer or installation of a bicycle carrier, with additional lighting and signalling.

Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.

We recommend the use of genuine

CITROËN towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle, and that the fitting of the towbar is entrusted to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

If the towbar is not fitted by a CITROËN dealer, it is imperative that it is fitted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.

Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care.


Driving advice

Distribution of loads

Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.

Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. Above

1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of altitude.

Refer to the "Technical data" section for details of the weights and towed loads which apply to your vehicle.

Side wind

Take into account the increased sensitivity to side wind.

Cooling

Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant.

As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.

To lower the engine speed, reduce your speed.

The maximum towed load on a long incline depends on the gradient and the ambient temperature.

In all cases, keep a check on the coolant temperature.

Braking

Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.

To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long mountain type of descent, the use of engine braking is recommended.

Tyres

Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.

If the warning lamp and the

STOP warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible.

Lighting

Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer.

7

When not towing a trailer, remove the quickly-detachable tow ball before driving.

The rear parking sensors will be deactivated automatically if a genuine

CITROËN towbar is used.

303

304


Roof bars

For safety reasons and to avoid damaging the roof, it is essential to use transverse roof bars that are approved for your vehicle.

Version without longitudinal bars

Version with longitudinal bars

Observe the fitting instructions and the conditions of use given in the information provided with the roof bars.

To install the roof bars, you must secure them only to the four anchorage points in the roof frame. These points are masked by the vehicle's doors when closed.

The roof bar fixings include a stud that should be introduced into the aperture at each anchorage point.

You must fit the transverse bars to the longitudinal bars at the fixing points indicated by engraved markings on the longitudinal bars.

Recommendations

Distribute the load evenly, avoiding overloading on one side.

Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close as possible to the roof.

Anchor the load securely and fit a warning flag if part of it overhangs the vehicle.

Drive gently, as the vehicle will be more liable to the effects of side winds (vehicle stability may be affected).

Remove the roof bars as soon as they are no longer needed.

Maximum load, distributed over the roof bars, for a loading height not exceeding

40 cm: 80 kg .

This value is subject to change, please check the maximum load stated in the instructions provided with he roof bars.

If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings on the vehicle.

Please refer to national legislation so as to meet the requirements on carrying objects that are longer than the vehicle.

When carrying long objects, it is recommended that you deactivate the motorised operation of the tailgate.


7

305

306


Very cold climate screen *

Removable protective screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.

Fitting

Offer up the very cold climate screen to the front of the lower section of the front bumper.

Press around its edge to engage its fixing clips one by one.

Removal

Use a screwdriver as a lever to release each fixing clip in turn.

Do not forget to remove the very cold climate screen when:

- the ambient temperature exceeds 10 °C,

- towing,

- driving at speeds above 75 mph

(120 km/h).

360 Vision system

The pre-cut zone must be removed before fitting the screen to the front bumper, to allow operation of the camera.

When the very cold climate screen is fitted, the image provided by the camera is slightly different.

* According to country.


Accessories

A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the CITROËN dealer network.

These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliability and safety.

They are all adapted to your vehicle and benefit from CITROËN's recommendation and warranty.

"Comfort":

door deflectors, side window blinds, rear screen blind, insulated module, coat hanger fixed to head restraint, mobile reading lamp, mirror for caravan, parking sensors, programmable additional heating, smoker's kit, solar film for rear door windows...

"Styling":

gear lever knobs, aluminium foot rest, alloy wheels...

"Protection":

mats * , seat covers compatible with lateral airbags, mud flaps, door protective mouldings, bumper protection strips, vehicle cover, boot sill protector, door sill protectors, seat and boot protective covers for pets...

The rear bodywork has been designed to avoid spray.

"Transport systems":

child seats and booster cushions, boot carpet, boot liner, boot net, boot spacers, transverse roof bars, ski carrier, roof boxes, towbars, towbar wiring harnesses, bicycle carriers for towbar and roof bars, towbars with fixed and detachable towball, high level load retaining net, sliding carrier, boot organiser

(Grand C4 Picasso)...

If a towbar and wiring harness are fitted outside the CITROËN dealer network, the installation must be done strictly in line with the manufacturer's recommendations.

If your vehicle has a detachable towball, it is recommended that the ball be removed when not towing.

"Security and safety":

anti-intrusion alarm, stolen vehicle tracking system, child seats and booster cushions, breathalyser, first aid kit, fire extinguisher, warning triangle, high visibility vest, wheel security bolts, snow chains, non-slip covers, winter tyres, foglamp kit, security film for front door windows, load retaining net, pet seat belt...

* To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:

- ensure that mats are correctly positioned and secured,


7

307

308


"Multimedia":

Speakers, Hi-Fi module, Bluetooth hands-free system, head-up display screen, portable satellite navigation system, semi-integral support bracket for portable navigation system, driving assistance systems, reversing camera, portable video screen, portable video carrier, telephone carrier, two-screen video pack, portable video player, CD player, solar USB charger, 230 V/50 Hz socket, 230 V/12 V adaptor, iPhone/iPad charger, Wi-Fi on board...

By visiting a CITROËN dealer you can also obtain cleaning and maintenance products

(interior and exterior) - including ecological products in the "TECHNATURE" range, products for topping up (screenwash...), paint touch-up pens and aerosols for the exact colour of your vehicle, refills (sealant cartridge for the temporary puncture repair kit...), ...

Installation of radio communication transmitters

Before installing any after-market radio communication transmitter, you can contact a CITROËN dealer for the specification of transmitters which can be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial position, specific installation requirements), in line with the Vehicle

Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

(2004/104/EC).

Depending on the legislation in force in the country, it may be compulsory to have a high visibility safety vest, warning triangle, breathalyzers and spare bulbs and fuses available in the vehicle.

The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by CITROËN may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system and excessive electrical consumption.

Please note this precaution. You are advised to contact a CITROËN representative to be shown the range of recommended equipment and accessories.

TOTAL & CITROËN

Checks

8

309

Checks

Bonnet

Before doing anything under the bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode.

310

Opening

Open the left hand front door.

Pull the release lever, located at the bottom of the door aperture, towards you.

Unclip the stay from its housing and place it in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.

Do not open the bonnet under very windy conditions.

When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the stay with care (risk of burns), using the protected area.

When the bonnet is open, take care not to damage the safety catch.

Closing

Take the stay out of its support slot.

Clip the stay back into its housing.

Lower the bonnet and release it at the end of its travel.

Pull on the bonnet to check that it has latched correctly.

The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might become caught by the fan blades.

Petrol engines

checking the levels of the various fluids and for replacing certain components.

1.

Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

2.

Coolant reservoir.

3.

Brake fluid reservoir.

4.

Battery / Fuses.

5.

Fusebox.

6.

Air filter.

7.

Engine oil dipstick.

8.

Engine oil filler cap.

Checks

8

311

Checks

Diesel engines

The various caps and covers allow access for checking the levels of the various fluids, for replacing certain components and for priming the fuel system.

1.

Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.

2.

Coolant reservoir.

3.

Brake fluid reservoir.

4.

Battery / Fuses.

5.

Fusebox.

6.

Air filter.

7.

Engine oil dipstick.

8.

Engine oil filler cap.

9.

Priming pump * .

312

* According to engine.

Checks

Fuel

Capacity of the tank: approximately 57 litres (petrol) or 55 litres (Diesel).

Refuelling Low fuel level

When the low fuel level is reached, this warning lamp in the instrument panel comes on, accompanied by an audible warning, a message and the last bar of the fuel gauge comes on in orange.

When it first comes on, about 6 litres of fuel remain in the tank.

Until sufficient fuel has been added, this warning lamp appears every time the ignition is switched on, accompanied by an audible warning and a message. This audible warning and message are repeated with increasing frequency as the fuel level drops towards " 0 ".

Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out.

A label on the inside of the fuel filler flap reminds you of the type of fuel to use, depending on your engine type.

Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to be registered by the fuel gauge.

With Stop & Start, never refuel with the system in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition with the START/STOP button.

Opening the filler flap may result in an inrush of air. This is entirely normal and results from the sealing of the fuel system.

Press the rear edge of the flap to open it

(the filler cap is part of it).

Take care to select the pump that delivers the correct type of fuel for your vehicle.

Introduce the nozzle so as to push in the metal non-return flap A.

Make sure that the nozzle is pushed in as far as possible before starting to refuel (risk of blowback).

Maintain this position throughout the refuelling operation.

8

If you are filling your tank to the top, do not persist after the 3rd cut-off; this could cause malfunctions.

313

314

Checks

The petrol or Diesel engine of your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, a device which helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions in the exhaust gases.

For petrol engines, you must use unleaded fuel.

The filler neck is narrower, allowing only unleaded petrol nozzles to be introduced.

Fuel cut-off

Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a collision.

If you have put in the wrong fuel for your vehicle, you must have the fuel tank drained and filled with the correct fuel before starting the engine.

Checks

Misfuel prevention (Diesel) *

Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel.

Operation

When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the flap. The system remains closed and prevents filling.

Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type filler nozzle.

It remains possible to use a fuel can to fill the tank.

In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact with the flap of the misfuel prevention device and pour slowly.

Travelling abroad

As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different in other countries, the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible.

Before travelling abroad, we recommend that you check with the

CITROËN dealer network, whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you want to travel.

8

* Depending on country of sale.

315

316

Checks

Quality of the fuel used for petrol engines

The petrol engines are perfectly compatible with E10 or E24 type petrol biofuels (containing

10 % or 24 % ethanol), conforming to European standards EN 228 and EN 15376.

E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol) are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must comply with European standard EN 15293.

Quality of the fuel used for

Diesel engines

The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible with biofuels which conform to current and future European standards (Diesel fuel which complies with standard EN 590 mixed with a biofuel which complies with standard EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing up to 7 %

Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).

The B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel engines; however, this use is subject to strict application of the special servicing conditions.


The use of any other type of (bio)fuel

(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system).

Running out of fuel (Diesel)

1.6 litre HDi engine

On vehicle fitted with HDi engines, the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel; refer to the corresponding engine compartment view.

If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with a misfuel prevention device, refer to the

"Misfuel prevention (Diesel)" section.

diesel.

Open the bonnet.

If necessary, unclip the styling cover for access to the priming pump.

Squeeze and release the priming pump repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at the first press).

Operate the starter until the engine starts

(if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again).

If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine.

Clip the styling cover back in place.

Close the bonnet.

If the engine does not start first time, don't keep trying but start the procedure again from the beginning.

Checks

8

317

318

Checks

Checking levels

Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the maintenance and warranty guide. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.

If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).

Oil level

The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator in the instrument panel, or using the dipstick.

It will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.

It is normal to top up the oil level between two services (or oil changes). CITROËN recommends that you check the level, and top up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).

After topping up the oil, the check when switching on the ignition with the oil level indicator in the instrument panel is not valid during the 30 minutes after topping up.

Engine oil change

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the interval for this operation.

In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system, the use of additives in the engine oil is prohibited.

Oil speci

fi

cation

The oil must be the correct grade for your engine and conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Dipstick

There are two marks on the dipstick:

A = maximum

If you fill past this mark, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

B = minimum

Top up the level through the oil filler orifice, using the correct grade of oil for your engine. The level must never be below this mark.

Checks

Brake fluid level

The brake fluid level should be close to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check the brake pad wear.

The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it.

When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan.

Changing the

fl

uid

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the interval for this operation.

The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might become caught by the fan blades.

Fluid speci

fi

cation

The brake fluid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and meet the

DOT3 or DOT4 standard.

In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work.

To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top up the level.

Fluid speci

fi

cation

The coolant must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.

8

319

320

Checks

Screenwash/headlamp wash level low

In the case of vehicles fitted with headlamp washers, when the fluid reservoir low level is reached this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.

The warning lamp comes on when the ignition is switched on, or every time the stalk is operated, until the reservoir is refilled.

Next time you stop, refill the screenwash / headlamp wash reservoir.

Diesel fuel additive level

(Diesel with particle emissions filter)

The additive reservoir low level is indicated by fixed illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message that the particle emissions filter additive level is too low.

Topping up

The reservoir must be topped up without delay by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Used products

fluids with the skin.

Most of these fluids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive.

Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground.

Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop (France) or to an authorised waste disposal site.

Checks

Checks

Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the maintenance and warranty guide and according to your engine.

Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

12 V battery

The battery does not require any maintenance.

However, check that the terminals are clean and correctly tightened, particularly in summer and winter.

When carrying out work on the battery, refer to the "12 V battery" section for details of the precautions to be taken before disconnecting the battery and following its reconnection.

Air filter and passenger compartment filter

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the replacement intervals for these components.

Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle

(e.g. city driving), replace them twice as often if necessary .

A clogged passenger compartment filter may have an adverse effect on the performance of the air conditioning system and generate undesirable odours.

Particle emissions filter (Diesel)

The start of saturation of the particle filter is indicated by the fixed illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by a warning message.

As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off.

If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a low additive level.

The presence of this label, in particular with the Stop & Start system, indicates the use of a specific 12 V lead-acid battery with special technology and specification. The involvement of a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop is essential when replacing or disconnecting the battery.

Oil filter

Replace the oil filter each time the engine oil is changed.

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the replacement interval for this component.

On a new vehicle, the first particle filter regeneration operations may be accompanied by a "burning" smell, which is perfectly normal.

Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the emission of water vapour at the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.

8

321

Checks

322

Manual gearbox

The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change).

Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for the details of the level checking interval for this component.

6-speed electronic gearbox

Brake pads

Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services.

Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.


This system does not require any routine servicing. However, in the event of a problem, have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

For more information, refer to the "Electric parking brake - Operating faults" section.


Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the checking interval for this component.

Brake disc wear

For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.

Automatic gearbox


Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide for details of the level checking interval for this component.

To avoid damaging the electrical units, the use of a high pressure washer in the engine compartment is strictly prohibited .

Only use products recommended by

CITROËN or products of equivalent quality and specification.

In order to optimise the operation of units as important as those in the braking system, CITROËN selects and offers very specific products.

After washing the vehicle, dampness, or in wintry conditions, ice can form on the brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may be reduced. Make light brake applications to dry and defrost the brakes.

Technical data

Petrol engines and gearboxes

Petrol engines VTi 120

Gearboxes

Manual

(5-speed)

Model codes :

3D... 3E... 3A...

Cubic capacity (cc)

5FS0/1

1 598

Bore x stroke (mm)

Max power * : EU standard (kW)

Max power engine speed (rpm)

Max torque: EU standard (Nm)

88

6 000

160

THP 155

Manual

(6-speed)

5FV8 - 8/1

1 598

115

6 000

240

1 400

Unleaded yes

Fuel

Catalytic converter

Oil capacities (in litres)

Engine (with filter replacement)

Unleaded

yes

3D...: CITROËN C4 Picasso (5-seat).

4.25

4.25

3E...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (5-seat). 3A...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (7-seat).

9

* The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under conditions defined in European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).

323

324

Technical data

Petrol weights and towed loads (in kg)

Petrol engines

Gearboxes

Model codes :

- Unladen weight

VTi 120

Manual

(5-speed)

3D... 3E... 3A...

5FS0/1

1 252 - 1 276 - 1 278

1 327 - 1 351 - 1 353

1 900 - 2 060 - 2 110 - Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

- Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12 % gradient

2 900 - 2 860 - 2 860

THP 155

Manual

(6-speed)

3D... 3E... 3A...

5FV8 - 8/1

1 296 - 1 311 - 1 313

1 371 - 1 386 - 1 388

1 940 - 2 100 - 2 150

3 360 - 3 350 - 3 350 on a 10 % or 12 % gradient

GTW limit)

1 200 - 1 100 - 1 050 1 620 - 1 550 - 1 500

660 - 675 - 675

70 - 70 - 70

685 - 690 - 690

70 - 70 - 70

* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg).

** The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount; warning, towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.

The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.

The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).

High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.

Technical data

Diesel engines and gearboxes

Diesel engines

Gearboxes

HDi 90

Manual

(5-speed)

9HP0/1

Model codes :

3D... 3E... 3A...

Cubic capacity (cc)

Bore x stroke (mm)




1 560

75 x 88.3

68

4 000

230 e-HDi 90

Airdream

Electronic gearbox system

(6-speed)

9HP8/2PS

Fuel

Catalytic converter

Particle emission filter



.../S: e-HDi model fitted with Stop & Start.


Diesel

yes

yes

3.75

3E...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (5-seat).

3A...: CITROËN Grand C4 Picasso (7-seat).


9

325

Technical data


Diesel engines

Gearboxes

Model codes:

3D... 3E... 3A...

Cubic capacity (cc)

Bore x stroke (mm)




HDi 115

Manual

(6-speed)

9HC8/1

1 560

75 x 88.3

85

3 600

270

Manual

(6-speed)

9HC8/1S e-HDi 115

Airdream


(6-speed)

9HC8/1PS - 8/2PS

1 560

75 x 88.3

85

3 600

270 - 285

1 750

326

Catalytic converter





3D...: CITROËN C4 Picasso (5-seat). yes

no

3.75



yes

yes

3.75


Technical data


Diesel engines

Gearboxes

Manual

(6-speed)

AHXM/S - M/1S

Model codes :

3D... 3E... 3A...

Cubic capacity (cc)

Bore x stroke (mm)



Max torque: EU standard (Nm) e-HDi 150

Airdream

1 997

85 x 88

110

3 750

370

Automatic

(6-speed)

AHXT/S - T/1S

Fuel

Catalytic converter








Diesel

yes

yes

6.1


9

327

Technical data

Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)

Diesel engines

Gearboxes

Model codes:

- Unladen weight

HDi 90

Manual

(5-speed)

3D

9HP0/1

1 279 e-HDi 90

Airdream


(6-speed)

3D... 3E... 3A

9HP8/2PS

1 289 - 1 314 - 1 316

328

- Gross vehicle weight (GVW)

- Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12% gradient

1 920

3 170

1 940 - 2 110 - 2 160

3 140 - 3 160 - 3 160 on a 10% or 12% gradient

1 250 1 200 - 1 050 - 1 000

GTW limit)

1 450 1 400 - 1 350 - 1 300

675 680 - 690 - 695

- Recommended nose weight 70 70 - 70 - 70






Technical data


Diesel engines HDi 115

Gearboxes

Model codes:

Manual

(6-speed)

3D... 3E... 3A...

9HC8/1

Manual

(6-speed)

3D... 3E... 3A...

9HC8/1S

- 1 298 - 1 318 - 1 320 e-HDi 115

Airdream


(6-speed)

3D... 3E... 3A...

9HC8/1PS - 8/2PS

1 295 - 1 318 - 1 320

1 373 - 1 393 - 1 395 1 373 - 1 393 - 1 395 1 370 - 1 393 - 1 395



1 940 - 2 110 - 2 150

2 740 - 2 910 - 2 950

1 940 - 2 110 - 2 150

3 340 - 3 350 - 3 350

1 940 - 2 110 - 2 150

3 340 - 3 350 - 3 350

on a 10% or 12% gradient

800 - 800 - 800 1 400 - 1 240 - 1 200 1 400 - 1 240 - 1 200

GTW limit)

800 - 800 - 800 1 600 - 1 540 - 1 500 1 600 - 1 540 - 1 500

- Recommended nose weight

685 - 695 - 695

70 - 70 - 70

685 - 695 - 695

70 - 70 - 70

685 - 695 - 695

70 - 70 - 70






9

329

330

Technical data


Diesel engines

Gearboxes

Model codes:

- Unladen weight

Manual

(6-speed)

3D... 3E... 3A...

AHXM/S - M/1S

1 415 - 1 428 - 1 430

1 490 - 1 503 - 1 505



2 030 - 2 200 - 2 250

3 530 - 3 560 - 3 650 e-HDi 150

Airdream


(6-speed)

3E... 3A ...

AHXT/S - T/1S

1 474 - 1 476

1 549 - 1 551

2 200 - 2 280

3 580 - 3 580 on a 10% or 12% gradient

GTW limit)

1 700 - 1 750 - 1 700 1 680 - 1 600

- Recommended nose weight

745 - 750 - 750

70 - 70 - 70

750 - 750

70 - 70






Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on a vehicle that is not loaded.

Technical data

* Mirrors folded.

9

331

Technical data

Dimensions (in mm)

These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.

332

* Mirrors folded.

Identi

fi

cation markings

Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle.

Technical data

D. Tyre/paint label.

the driver's side, contains the following information.

- the tyre inflation pressures with and without load,

- the tyre sizes (including the tyre load index and speed rating),

- the inflation pressure for the spare wheel,

- the paint colour code.

A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) under the bonnet.

This number is engraved on the chassis near the right hand front wheel arch.

B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on the windscreen lower cross member.

This number is indicated on a selfadhesive label which is visible through the windscreen.

C. Manufacturer's label.

This self-destroying label affixed to the centre pillar, right or left hand side, contains the following information.

- the manufacturer's name,

- the European whole vehicle type approval number,

- the vehicle identification number (VIN),

- the maximum authorised weight (gross vehicle weight),

- the maximum authorised weight with trailer (gross train weight),

- the maximum front axle weight,

- the maximum rear axle weight.

The tyre pressures must be checked when the tyres are cold, at least once a month.

If the tyre pressures are too low, this increases fuel consumption.

9

333

334

Technical data

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

335

EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL

CITROËN Localised Emergency Call CITROËN Localised Assistance Call

In an emergency, press this button for more than

2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice g

"CITROËN fi rm that the call has been made to the

Localised Emergency Call" service * .

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green

LED goes off.

The green LED remains on (without fl ashing) when communication is established. It goes off at the end of communication.

Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down.

A voice message con fi rms that the call has been made * .

Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.

The cancellation is con fi rmed by a voice message.

Operation of the system

This call is dealt with by the "CITROËN Localised Emergency Call" centre which receives locating information from the vehicle and can send a detailed alert to the appropriate emergency services. In countries in which the team is not operational, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is dealt with directly by the emergency services (112) without the vehicle location.

If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.

y fi , y additional services in your MyCITROËN personal space, via the CITROËN

Internet website in your country, accessible on www.citroen.com.

* These services are subject to conditions and availability.

Consult a CITROËN dealer.

336

If you purchased your vehicle outside the CITROËN dealer network, and, if desired, modi con fi fi

When the ignition is switched on, the green

LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.

If the orange LED fl ashes: there is a system fault.

If the orange LED is on continuously: the backup battery must be replaced.

In either case, contact a CITROËN dealer. we invite you to have a dealer check the con fi guration of these services

ed to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country,

guration is possible in the of fi cial national language of your choice.

For technical reasons, particularly to improve the quality of Telematic services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.

Touch screen tablet

SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

MULTIMEDIA AUDIO SYSTEM

BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE

operate in your vehicle.

For safety reasons, the driver must carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary.

When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the system switches off following the activation of the energy economy mode.

CONTENTS

01 General operation

02 First steps - Control panel

04 Media

05 Navigation

06 Configuration

07 Connected services

08 Telephone p. p.

8

340 p. p. p. p. p.

342

358

378

388

390

337

338

01 GENERAL OPERATION

" Air conditioning " allows control of the settings for temperature, air fl ow.

" Driving assistance " allows certain vehicle functions to be activated, deactivated and settings adjusted.

" Media " allows selection of a radio station, MP3 music, display of photographs.

" Navigation " allows settings for navigation and the choice of a destination

(depending on version).

" Con fi " allows settings for sound, the colour scheme.

" Connected services " allows connection to an applications portal to facilitate, make safe and personalise journeys by means of a connection key available on subscription from a

CITROËN dealer.

" Telephone " allows the connection of a mobile telephone via Bluetooth so as to be able to make calls safely.

01 GENERAL OPERATION

Use the buttons on either side of the touch screen tablet for access to the menus, then press the virtual buttons on the touch screen tablet.

Each menu is displayed on one or two pages (primary page and secondary page).

An example of using the touch screen tablet:

These screens are the representation of a colour scheme.

To change the colour scheme refer to the " CONFIGURATION " section.

In very hot conditions, the system may go into stand-by (screen and sound completely off) for a minimum period of 5 minutes.

339

02 FIRST STEPS

Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including Traf fi c announcements

(TA) and navigation instructions).

Following prolonged operation in sunny conditions, the volume may be limited to protect the system. The return to normal takes place when the temperature in the passenger compartment drops.

Selecting the audio source (depending on version):

- CD player (located in the glove box) * .

- Jukebox fi rst copying audio fi les to the internal memory of the touch screen tablet.

- Telephone connected by Bluetooth and Bluetooth audio streaming.

The screen is of the "resistive" type, it is necessary to press fi rmly, particularly for " fl ick" gestures (scrolling through a list, moving the map...).

A simple wipe will not be enough. pressing with more than one fi nger is not recognised.

The screen can be used when wearing gloves. This technology allows use at all temperatures.

To clean the screen, use a soft non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) without any additional product.

Do not use pointed objects on the screen.

Do not touch the screen with wet hands.


340

03 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS

- Mute.

Media: display the list of tracks.

- Rotation

Radio: automatic selection of next / previous frequency.

Media: previous / next track.

- Press then rotation: access to preset stations.

- Change the audio source.

- Move in the menus.

Zoom the map in and out

Press: con fi rmation, choice of source accepted

Access to the telephone menu:

Call list / Contacts / Hands-free mode / Answer /

Hang up.

Accept an incoming call

Long press: reject an incoming call or end the current call.

Change the multimedia source.

Accept an incoming call.

Call in progress: access to the telephone menu (End call,

Secret mode, Hands-free mode).

- Long press:

Reject an incoming call.

End a call in progress.

Other than call in progress: access to the telephone menu (Dial, Contacts, Call log, Answerphone).

- Rotation.

Radio: automatic search for previous / next station.

Media: previous / next track.

- Press: con fi rmation.

Radio: display the list of stations.

Media: display the list of tracks.

- Long press: update the list of stations received.

- Increase volume.

- Decrease volume.

341

342

04 MEDIA

Level 1

"Media"

Primary page

Level 2

List of FM stations

Level 3

Recalling preset stations

Level 1

Media

List

Media

Source

Media

Memo

Level 2


Con fi

FM Radio

DAB Radio

AM Radio

Jukebox

CD

USB iPod

Bluetooth

AUX

Video

Recall of preset stations

Level 3 Comments

Press on a radio station to select it.

Save the settings.

Select change of source

Press on a radio station to select it.

343

04 MEDIA

Level 1

"Media"

Secondary page

Level 2


Photos

Media

Copy to Jukebox

Level 3

Manage Jukebox

Level 1

Media

Secondary page

Radio list

Media

Secondary page

Photos

Media

Secondary page

Manage Jukebox

Level 2

Preset

Update list

Frequency

Con fi

Page selection

Rotate

Select all

Slideshow

Con fi

Sort by folder

Sort by album

Select all

Magnifying glass

Copy

Level 3

Previous photo.

Pause / Play.

Next photo.

Create folder

Rename

Delete

Select all

Con fi rm

Comments

Press a radio station to select it.

Update the list of stations received.

Enter the desired radio frequency.

Save the settings.

Display the selected photo full screen.

Rotate the photo 90°.

Select all the photos in the list.

Press again to deselect.

Display the photos in sequence, full screen.

Save the settings.

Choose the selection mode.

Choose the handling mode.

Save the options.

Save the settings

345

346

04 MEDIA

Level 1

"Media"

Secondary page

Media

Level 2 Level 3

Radio settings

Radio settings

Level 1

Media

Secondary page

Media list

Media

Secondary page

Media options

Level 2 Level 3 Comments

Presentation of the last media used.

Media

Media options

Radio

Radio settings

Announcements

Radio settings

Con fi rm

Random (all tracks):

Random (current album):

Loop:

Aux. ampli fi cation

RDS options

DAB/FM options

Display Radio Text

DAB radio thumbnails

Traf fi c announcements (TA)

Weather

Varied - Sport

Alert settings

Choose the play settings.

Activate or deactivate the options.

Activate or deactivate the options.

Save the settings.

347

04 RADIO

Selecting a station

Press on Media to display the primary page.

or

Press on Media to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.

Select " List " in the primary page.

or

Select " Radio list " in the secondary page.

Select a radio station from the list offered.

OR

Press Media to display the primary page then select " Memo ".

Select a preset radio station in the list.

If necessary, select change of source.

Select " Update list " to refresh the list.

Select " FM Radio " or " AM Radio ".

348

The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking mode.

This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio system.

04 RADIO

Changing a radio frequency


By automatic frequency search

Press or to move the cursor for an automatic search down or up for a radio frequency.

Select change source.

Select " FM Radio " or " AM Radio ".

OR

Press on Media to display the primary page then press on the secondary page.

Press on " Enter frequency " to display the primary page then press on the secondary page.

THEN

OR

Enter the frequency in full (e.g.:

92.10 MHz) using the keypad then

" Con fi rm ".

By alphabetical list

Press the current radio band then choose the radio station from the list offered.

349

04 RADIO

Preset a station

Select a radio station or frequency

(refer to the corresponding section).

Press on " Preset ".

350

Select a number in the list to preset the previously chosen radio station.

A long press on a number presets (memorises) the station.

Or

A press on this button presets all of the stations one after the other.

Recall pre-set stations

Press on Media to display the primary page then select " Memo ".

Activate/ Deactivate RDS


Select " Settings ".

Select " Radio ".

Activate/deactivate " RDS options ".

RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.

04 RADIO

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - Digital radio

Digital radio provides higher quality reception and also the graphical display of current information on the radio station, by selecting "Video mode" in "Radio settings".

The range of all stations available is displayed in alphabetical order.


Automatic DAB-FM station tracking allows you to continue listening to the same station, by temporarily switching to the equivalent analogue station until the digital signal is stable again.

Select change of source.



Select " DAB Radio ".

Select " List " in the primary page.

or

Select " Radio list " in the secondary page.

Select the radio station from the list offered.

Select " RADIO ".

Select " Digital/FM station tracking " then

" Con fi rm ".

351

352

04 MUSIC

CD, MP3 CD, USB player, auxiliary input

Insert the CD in the player, insert the USB memory stick in the USB player or connect the

USB peripheral to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied)

The system builds playlists (in temporary memory), an operation which can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the fi rst connection.

Reduce the number of non-music fi les and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time.

The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or connection of a USB memory stick. However, the system memorises these lists and if they are not modi fi ed, the loading time will be shorter.

Selection of source


Select change of source then choose the source.

The steering mounted SRC (source) button can be used to go to the next media source, available if the source is active.

" CD / CD MP3 "

" Radio "

" USB, iPod "

" Auxiliary " " Bluetooth (streaming) "

04 MUSIC

CD, MP3 CD / USB player

Information and advice

The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with ".wma, .aac,

.

fl ac, .ogg and .mp3" fi le extensions and with a bit rate of between

32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.

It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.

No other type of fi le (.mp4, ...) can be played.

WMA fi les must be of the standard wma 9 type.

The sampling rates supported are 11, 22, 44 and 48 KHz.

It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.

In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.

If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly.

It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality.

In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.

The system supports USB mass storage devices, BlackBerry ®

devices or Apple players via the right hand USB port. The adaptor cable is not supplied.

Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls.

Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not supplied).

In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted

FAT 16 or 32.

The system does not support two identical devices connected at the same time (two memory sticks, two Apple connect one memory stick and one Apple ® players) but it is possible to

player at the same time.

It is recommended that of fi cial Apple ® USB cables are used to ensure correct operation.

353

354

04 MUSIC

Selecting a track to play

Previous track.

Next track.

Previous folder.

Next folder.

Pause.

/

/

List of USB or CD tracks and folders.

Up or down in the list.

Con fi rm, next menu level.

Up one menu level.

04 MUSIC

Connecting APPLE

®

players

For issues related to the power consumption of devices, connect the Apple ® player to the right hand USB port using a suitable cable

(not supplied).

Play starts automatically.

Control is via the audio system.

The classi fi cations available are those of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts).

The default classi fi cation used is by artist. To modify the classi fi cation used, return to the fi rst level of the menu then select the desired classi fi cation (playlists for example) and con fi rm to go down through the menu to the desired track.

Copies of photos and album artwork are not compatible with the audio system. These appear only with a USB memory stick.

The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple ® player. p from CITROËN dealers.

Audio streaming

Streaming allows audio fi les on your telephone to be played via the vehicle's speakers.

Connect the telephone : see the " Telephone " section, then

" Bluetooth ".

Choose the " Audio " or " All " pro fi le.

If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the telephone.

Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system buttons.

Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be a media source.

It is recommended that you activate " Repeat " on the Bluetooth peripheral.

355

356

04 MUSIC

Using the auxiliary input (AUX)

(cable not supplied)

Connect the portable device (MP3 player…) to the auxiliary JACK socket using an audio cable.

Select Media to display the primary page.

Select change the source.

Select the AUXILIARY source.

First adjust the volume of your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system.

Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.

04 MUSIC

Managing the Jukebox

Connect the device (MP3 player...) to the USB port or auxiliary socket using a suitable audio cable.

When no audio fi le is copied to the system with a capacity of 8GB, all of the Jukebox function symbols are greyed and are not available.

Select " Media list ".

Select the magnifying glass to enter the folder or album and select audio

Select " Con fi rm " then " fi le by audio

Copy ".

fi le.

Select " New folder r " to create a folder structure in the Jukebox or select " Keep structure " to retain the structure from the device.

Select copy " Copy Jukebox ".

Select " Sort by folder " or " Sort by album ".

While copying the system returns to the primary page; you can go back to the copy view at any time by selecting this button.

357

358

05 NAVIGATION

Level 1

"Navigation"

Primary page

Level 2

Navigation

Level 3

Route settings

Level 1

Navigation

Settings

Navigation

Navigation

Map

Level 2

Recent destinations

Calculatory criteria

Level 3

Fastest

Shortest

Time/distance

Ecological

Tolls

Ferries

Strict - Close

Show route on map

Con fi rm

Save current location

Stop navigation

Voice synthesis

Diversion

Comments

Display recent destinations

Choose the navigation criteria.

The map displays the route chosen according to these criteria.

Display the map and start navigation.

Save the options.

Save the current address.

Delete the navigation information.

Choose the volume for voice and announcement of street names.

Detour from your initial route by a certain distance.

Zoom in.

Zoom out.

Use the arrows to move the map.

Calculatory criteria

Add a waypoint.

Switch to 2D map.

359

360

05 NAVIGATION

Level 1

"Navigation"

Level 2

Enter destination

Secondary page

Navigation Search for a point of interestt

Level 3

Enter address

For managing contacts and their addresses, refer to the

" Communications " section.

Contacts

To use the telephone functions, refer to the " Communications " section.

Search for a point of interestt

Point of interest displayed on the map

Level 1

Navigation

Secondary page

Enter destination

Contacts

Navigate to

Navigation

Secondary page

Search for a point of interest

Garage

Dining/hotels

Personal

By name

Con fi

Navigation

Secondary page

Display point of interest

Delete

Import POIs

Con fi

Level 2 Level 3

Curr. location

Points of Interest

Town centre

Save

Add waypoint

Navigate to

Addresses

Add contact

Add waypoint

Search for contact

Navigate to

Comments

Address settings

Save the current address.

Add a waypoint to the route.

Press to calculate the route.

Select a contact then calculate the route.

Display the map and zoom to view the roads.

Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the itinerary.

Delete navigation information.

Press to calculate the route.

List of categories available.

After choosing the category, select the points of interest.

Save the settings.

Choose the display settings for POIs.

Save the options.

361

362

05 NAVIGATION

Level 1 Level 2

Traf fi c messages

"Navigation"

Secondary page

Map settings

Navigation

Settings

Level 3

Diversion

Map settings

Settings

Settings

Moving between the two menus.

Level 1

Navigation

Secondary page

Traf fi

Level 2

On the route

Around

Near destination

Detour

Finish

Orientation

Navigation

Secondary page

Map settings

News

Aspect

Navigation

Secondary page

Settings

Con fi rm

Route settings

Voice synthesis

Alert!

Traf fi c options

Con fi rm


Settings for the choice of messages and the fi lter radius.

Detour over a distance

Recalculate route

Flat view north heading

Flat view vehicle heading

Perspective view

Save the options.

Choose the display and orientation of the map.

"Day" map colour

"Night" map colour

Automatic day/night

Save the settings.

Enter settings and choose the volume for the voice and announcement of street names.

Save the options.

363

05 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE

Choosing a new destination

Towards a new destination

Select " Navigate to ".

Press on Navigation to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.

Choose the navigation criteria : " Fastest " or

" Shortest " or " Time/distance " or " Ecological ".

Select " Enter destination ".

Choose the restriction criteria : " Include tollroads ", " Include ferries ", " Traf c ", " Strict ",

" Close ".

Select " Address ".

Select " Con fi rm " or press " Show route on map " to start navigation guidance.

364

Select the " Country: " from the list offered then in the same way : the " City: " or its post code, the " Road: ", the

" N°: ". Con fi rm each time.

Select " Save " to save the address entered as a contact entry.

The system allows up to 200 entries.

To delete navigation information, press on

" Settings " then " Stop navigation ".

To restore the navigation information press on

" Settings " then " Resume navigation ".


Towards a recent destination



Select an address from the list offered.


Select the criteria then " Con fi " or press

" Show route on map " to start guidance.

Towards a contact

Navigation towards a contact imported from a telephone is only possible if the address entered is compatible with the system.



Select " Contacts ".

Select a destination from the contacts in the list offered.


Select the criteria then " Con fi rm " to start guidance.

365


Towards GPS coordinates



Select " Address ".

Towards a point on the map



Select " From map ".

Enter the " Longitude: " then the " Latitude: ".

366


Select the criteria then " Con fi rm " or press

" Show route on map " to start guidance.

Zoom in on the map then select the point.

A long press displays the surrounding tourist attractions.



Select " Search for a point of interest ".

Select " All POIs " or " Garage " or " Dining/ hotels " or " Personal " or " By name ".

Points of Interest (POI) show all of the locations of services nearby (hotels, retail outlet, airports, ...).

Select a point of interest from the list offered.


An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you.

You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month.

The detailed procedure is available on http://citroen.navigation.com.

Select a category from the list offered.

Select " Search ".

367

368


Towards points of interest (POI)


Select " Show POIs ".

"

Select a category from the list offered then

Con rm ".


Risk area alert settings



Select " Alert con fi g.

".

It is then possible to activate Risk Areas alerts then:

- "Audible warning"

- "Alert only when navigating"

- "Display speed limits"

- Timing: the choice of timing allows the time before giving a Risk

Area alert to be de fi ned.

Select " Con fi rm ".

These functions are only available if Risk Areas have been downloaded and installed on the system.


Adding a waypoint Organising waypoints



Select " Itinerary ".

370

Select " Add waypoint " then " Enter address ".

The address of the waypoint is entered in the same way as a destination, so enter the " City: " or post code, the " Road: " and the " N°: ". Con fi rm each time.

Then select " Add waypoint ".


Select the criteria then " Con fi rm " to start guidance and give the general direction of the navigation route.

To organise waypoints, carry out the previous operations 1 to 3 again (Adding a waypoint).

Select the waypoint that you want to move in the order.

Select " Up ".

Select " Down ".

Select " Delete ".

Select " Road map " to view the changes made to the route.


Route options

Calculation criteria

Press Navigation to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.

It is then possible to choose:

- the Fastest ", " Shortest ", " Time/distance ",

" Ecological ".

- the exclusion criteria: " Include tollroads " , " Include ferries ",

" Traf fi c ", " Strict ", " Close ".



Select " Criteria ".

The ecological calculation is based on mapping data but this may not always be correct.

371

05 TRAFFIC

Traffic information

Display of messages


Select " Traf fi c messages ".

Set the " On the route ", " Around ", " Near destination " fi lters to fi ne-tune the list .

Press again to remove the fi lter.

Select the message from the list offered.

Select the magnifying glasses to have the information spoken.

372

TMC (Traf fi c Message Channel) messages contain information on traf fi c and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the navigation map.

Setting

fi

lters



Select " Info option ".

Select:

- " ",

- " ",

Then enter the fi lter radius.


We recommend a fi lter radius of:

05 TRAFFIC

Main traf

fi

c symbols

Red and yellow triangle: traf fi c information, for example:

Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:

Receiving TA messages



Select " Voice ".

Activate / Deactivate " Traf fi ".

The TA (Traf fi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traf fi c report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.

373

374

05 TRAFFIC

Diverting from a route


Select " Traf fi c messages ".

Select " Diversion ".

Select the diversion distance by pressing + or .

Select " Recalculate route ". The route will be modi fi ed in time and distance.


The route may be diverted following the reception of a traf fi c information message.

05

Map settings

Map orientation


Select " Map settings ".

Select " Orientation ".

Select:

- " " to keep the map always North up,

- " " to have the map follow the direction of travel,

" Perspective view " to display a perspective view.

Select " Con fi rm " to save the modi fi cations.

375

376

05 MAP

Con

fi

gure


Select " Map settings ".

Select " Aspect ".

Select:

- " "Day" map colour " to have the map always in day mode.

- " "Night" map colour " to have the map always in night mode.

" Automatic day/night " to have the brightness of the map adjusted automatically according to the ambient light level.

This mode makes use of the vehicle's sunshine sensor or by manual operation of the vehicle's lighting.

Then " Con fi rm " to save the modi fi cations.

Street names are visible on the map from the 100 m scale.

05 SETTINGS

Navigation speech synthesis

Volume / Street names



Select " Voice synthesis ".

Select " Voice synthesis " and/or " Male voice " and/or " Female voice " and/or " Speak road names ".

Select " Con fi rm " to save the modi fi cations.

377

378

06 CONFIGURATION

Level 1

"Configuration"

Primary page

Level 2

Audio settings

Choice of colours

Level 3

Audio settings

Audio settings

Level 1

Con fi

Audio settings

Audio settings

Con fi

Color

Choice of colour scheme

Con fi

Interactive help

Con fi

Level 2

Ambience

Balance

Sound effects

Voice

Ringtones

Con fi


Choose the sound ambience.

Set the position of the sound in the vehicle using the

Arkamys system.

Choose the volume or activate the link to vehicle speed.

Choose the volume for the voice and announcement of street names.

Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.

Save the settings.

After choosing the colour scheme, save the setting.

Consult the Interactive help.

380


Level 1 Level 2

"Configuration"

Units

Secondary page

Con fi guration Time/Date

Display screen

Factory settings

Level 1

Con fi

Secondary page

System

Con guration

Con fi

Secondary page

Screen settings

Units

Erase data

Factory settings

Con fi rm

Level 2

Con fi

Secondary page

Time/Date

Con fi rm

Brightness

Automatic text scrolling

Deactivate animations

Validate

Comments

Set the units used to display distance, fuel consumption and temperature.

Select the desired data in the list then press Delete.

Return to factory settings.

Save the settings.

Set the date and time then con fi rm.

Make the setting then con fi rm.

381

382


Level 1 Level 2

"Configuration"

Choice of language

Secondary page

Con fi guration Calculator

Calendar

Level 1

Con fi

Secondary page

System languages

Con fi

Secondary page

Calculator

Con fi

Secondary page

Calendar

Con fi


Select the language then con fi rm.

Select the calculator.

Select the calendar.

383


Audio settings

Press on Con fi guration to display the primary page.

Select " Audio settings ".

Select " Ambience " or " Balance " or " Sound effects " or " Voice " or " Ringtones ".

384

The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys © system) of sound is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the number of listeners in the vehicle.

The audio settings ( Ambience , Bass , Treble and Loudness ) are different and independent for each sound source.

The settings for distribution and balance are common to all sources.

- " Ambience " (choice of 6 musical ambiences)

- " Bass "

" Treble "

" Loudness " (Activate/Deactivate)

Balance (" Surround ", " Driver ", " All passengers ", " Front only ",

" ByPass ")

- " Audio setting on touch screen "

- " Volume linked to vehicle speed: " (Activate/Deactivate)

On-board audio: Arkamys © Sound Staging.

With Sound Staging, the driver and passengers are immersed in an

"audio scene" recreating the natural atmosphere of an auditorium: truly a part of the scene and its surroundings.

This new sensation is made possible by software in the audio system which processes the digital signals from the media players

(radio, CD, MP3…) without changing the audio settings. This processing takes account of the characteristics of the passenger compartment to produce optimum results.

The Arkamys © software installed in your audio system processes the digital signal from the media players (radio, CD, MP3, ...) and recreates a natural musical scene, with harmonious placement of instruments and voices in the space in front of passengers, level with the windscreen.


Colour schemes Interactive help

Press on page.

Select "

Con fi guration

Colour schemes to display the primary

".

Select the colour scheme in the list then

" Con fi rm ".

At each change of colour scheme the touch screen tablet's system restarts, showing a black screen for a few moments.

For safety reasons, the procedure for changing the colour scheme is only possible with the vehicle stationary.

Press on Con fi guration to display the primary page.

Select " Interactive help ".

The interactive version of your handbook available in this touch screen is not intended as a substitute for the more complete content of the printed document.

For safety reasons, consultation of your handbook is only possible with the vehicle stationary.

385


System

Modify system settings

Press on Con fi guration to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.

Select " System con fi ".

Select " Units " to change the units of distance, fuel consumption and temperature.

Select " Delete data " to delete the list of recent destinations, personal points of interest, contacts in the list.

Choose the item then select " Delete ".

386

Select " Factory settings " to return to the original settings.

Press on Con fi guration to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.

Select " Screen settings ".

Select " Brightness " to switch off the screen or adjust the brightness.

Activate or deactivate " Activate automatic text scrolling " and " Activate animations ".


Press on Con fi to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.

Select:

" Time/Date " to change the time zone, synchronisation with GPS, time and its format and then the date.

- " " to change the language.

- " r " to display a calculator

- " r " to display a calculator.

387

07 CONNECTED SERVICES

Level 1

"Connected services"

Primary page :

Driving assistance pp , page on "CITROËN

MULTICITY CONNECT" * .

Secondary page:

Internet navigation via

Bluetooth telephone Dial-Up

Networking (DUN).

Internet Navigation

Level 2

Identi fi cation

DUN connection settings

It may be that certain new generation smartphones are not compatible with this standard.

Transfer rate

07 CITROËN MULTICITY CONNECT

"CITROËN MULTICITY CONNECT" is a driving assistance applications service that gives access in real time to useful information such as the state of the traf fi c, danger zones, fuel prices, the availability of parking places, tourist sites, weather conditions, correct addresses… pp contract taken out at CITROËN dealer, available according to country and the type of touch screen, either before or after delivery of the vehicle.

Plug the "CITROËN MULTICITY CONNECT" connection key into the right hand USB port.

The applications use vehicle data such as the current speed, mileage, remaining fuel range or even GPS position to provide pertinent information.

Press on the "Connected services" menu to display the applications.

For safety reasons, some functions can only be used when stationary.

The "MyCITROËN" application is a link between the user, the manufacturer and its dealer network.

It allows the customer to know everything about their vehicle: servicing booklet, accessory range, service contracts taken out.

It also makes possible the sending of the vehicle's mileage to the identify a dealer.

g

"MyCITROËN" website, or to

390

08 TELEPHONE

Level 1

"Telephone"

Primary page

Level 2

Contacts

Level 3

Call log

Level 2

Addresses

Add contact

Telephone

Contacts

Telephone

Call log

Add waypoint

By name

Call

All calls

Incoming calls

Outgoing calls

Contact

Magnifying glass

Call

Level 3

New

Modify

Delete

Delete all

Search for contact

Con fi rm

View contact

New

Comments

After making choices, start the call.

After making choices, start the call.

391

392

08

Level 1

"Telephone"

Secondary page

Level 2

Bluetooth menu

Level 3

Telephone options

Level 1

Telephone

Secondary page

Bluetooth menu

Level 2

Search

Disconnect

Update

Delete

Con fi

Telephone

Secondary page

Search for devices

Telephone

Secondary page

Telephone options

Put on hold

Update

Choice of ringtone:

Memory info.

Con fi

Level 3

Telephone pro fi le

Streaming pro fi le

Internet pro fi le

Comments

Start the search for another peripheral device to connect.

Stop the Bluetooth connection to the selected peripheral device.

Import the contacts from the selected telephone to store them in the audio system.

Delete the selected telephone.

Save the settings.

Start the search for peripheral devices

Cut the microphone temporarily so that the contact cannot hear your conversation with a passenger.

Import the contacts from the selected telephone to save then in the audio system.

Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.

Contact records used and free, percentage of storage space used by internal contacts and Bluetooth contacts.

Save the settings.

393

394

08 BLUETOOTH

Pairing a Bluetooth telephone

First connection

Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone con fi guration).

Press on Telephone to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.

Select the " Bluetooth " menu.

Select Search .

The list of peripherals detected is displayed.

If the peripheral is not detected, it is recommended that you switch the Bluetooth function on your telephone off and then on again.

Select the name of the desired peripheral from the list and Con rm .

For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio system must be carried out with the vehicle stationary .

"

Choose a code for the connection then

Con rm ".

Enter the same code on the telephone then accept the connection.

The system offers to connect the telephone:

in " Telephone pro fi le " (telephone only).

in " Streaming pro fi " (streaming: playing audio fi les from the telephone),

- in le " (internet browser only),

Select and Con fi rm.

The " Hands-free " pro fi le should be used in preference if "Streaming" is not desired.

The ability of the system to connect with only one pro fi le depends on the telephone. The two pro fi les may both connect by default.

Visit www.citroen.co.uk for more information (compatibility, additional help, ...).

08 BLUETOOTH

The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.

The telephone is added to the list.

Depending on your telephone, you may be asked to accept automatic connection every time the ignition is switched on.

Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to accept or not the transfer of your contacts.

If not, select " Update ".

On return to the vehicle, the last telephone connected automatically reconnects, within around 30 seconds after switching on the ignition

(Bluetooth activated).

To modify the automatic connection mode, select the telephone in the list then select the desired pro fi le.

Connecting a Bluetooth peripheral

Automatic reconnection

On switching on the ignition, the telephone connected when the ignition was last switched off is automatically reconnected, if this connection mode had been activated during the pairing procedure

(see previous pages).

The connection is con fi rmed by the display of a message and the name of the telephone.

Manual connection


Select " Bluetooth " to display the list of paired peripherals.

Select the peripheral to connect.

Press on " Search ".

The connection is con fi rmed by the display of a message and the name of the telephone.

395

08 BLUETOOTH

Managing paired telephones Receiving a call

This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing.


Select " Bluetooth " to display the list of paired peripheral devices.

Select the peripheral in the list.

396

Select:

" Search " or " Disconnect " to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection with the peripheral selected.

" Delete " to remove the pairing.

An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.

Make a short press on the steering mounted

TEL button to accept an incoming call.

Make a long press on the steering mounted

TEL button to reject the call.

or

Select " End call ".

08 CONTACTS

Making a call

Calling a new number

Press on Telephone to display the primary page.

Enter the phone number using the keypad then

" Call " to start the call.

Use of the telephone is not recommended while driving.

We recommended that you park safely or make use of the steering mounted controls.

Calling a contact


Or make a long press on the steering mounted

TEL button.


Select the desired contact from the list offered.

Select " CALL ".

397

398

08 CALL LOG

Ending a call

Calling a recently used number


Select " Call log ".

Select the desired contact from the list offered.

It is always possible to make a call directly from the telephone; park the vehicle fi rst as a safety measure.

Select " End call ".

or

Make a long press on the steering mounted

TEL button.

08 SETTINGS

Ringtones


Select " Telephone options ".

Select " Choice of ringtone: ".

You can select the ringtone used and adjust its volume.


Managing contacts / Entries



Select " View contact ".

Select:

- " New " to add a new contact.

- " Modify " to edit the selected contact.

- " Delete " to delete the selected contact.

- " Delete all " to delete all of the information for the selected contact.

Select " Directory information " for the number of entries used, available, ...

399

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.

QUESTION

The route calculation is not successful.

ANSWER

Navigation, guidance

The guidance criteria may con fl ict with the current location (exclusion of toll roads on a toll motorway).

SOLUTION

Check the guidance criteria on the Navigation

Menu, "Guidance options"\ "De criteria". fi ne calculation

I am unable to enter my post code.

The system only accepts post codes of up to 5 characters.

The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected.

Select the POIs in the list of POIs.

The risk areas audible warning does not work.

The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the Guidance options menu, "Navigation - guidance", "Set parameters for risk areas".

The system does not suggest a detour around an incident on the route.

The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. fi c info" function in the list of guidance criteria.

I receive a Risk area alert which is not on my route.

Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for a Risk area located on nearby or parallel roads.

Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the Risk area. Select "On the route" to no longer receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce the time for the announcement.

400


QUESTION

Certain traf fi c jams along the route are not indicated in real time.

The altitude is not displayed.

I cannot connect my

Bluetooth telephone.

The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible.

ANSWER

On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the traf fi c information.

The fi lters are too restrictive.

In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traf fi c information.

On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites correctly.

Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.

SOLUTION

Wait until the traf fi c information is being received correctly (display of the traf fi c information icons on the map).

Modify the "Geographic fi lter" settings.

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traf fi c information available.

Wait until the system has started up completely.

Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least

4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then select "GPS coverage").

This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.

Telephone, Bluetooth

The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone may not be visible.

The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.

The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.

The ambient noise level has an in communication. fl uence on the quality of telephone that function is switched on.

- Check in the telephone settings that it is

"visible to all".

A list of compatible Bluetooth mobile telephones is available from the dealer network.

Increase the volume of the audio system, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.

Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).

401


QUESTION

Some contacts are duplicated in the list.

ANSWER

The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.

SOLUTION

Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display telephone contacts".

Contacts are not shown in alphabetical order.

Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can be transferred in a speci fi c order.

Modify the display setting in the telephone directory.

The system does not receive SMS text messages.

The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the system.

The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.

CD, MP3

The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.

The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player.

The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio system.

There is a long waiting period following the insertion of a CD or connection of a

USB memory stick.

When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a few minutes.

The CD player sound is poor.

The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.

The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.

- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the right way up.

- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be played if it is too damaged.

- Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section.

- The audio system's CD player does not play DVDs.

- Some recorded CDs will not be played by the audio system because they are not of the correct quality.

This phenomenon is normal.

Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.

Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.

402


QUESTION ANSWER

Some characters in the media information are not displayed correctly while playing.

The audio system does not display some types of characters.

SOLUTION

Use standard characters to name tracks and folders.

Start the playback from the device. Playing of streaming fi les does not start.

The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play.

The names of tracks and the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio.

The Bluetooth pro fi le does not allow the transfer of this information.

The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.

Radio

The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function

(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).

The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.

I cannot fi nd some radio stations in the list of stations received.

The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going through a car wash or into an underground car park).

The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.

The name of the radio station changes.

Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example).

The system interprets this information as the name of the station.

Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.

This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault with the audio system.

Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.

403


QUESTION

In changing the setting of treble and bass the equalizer setting is deselected.

In changing the equalizer setting, treble and bass return to zero.

ANSWER

Settings, con fi guration

The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings.

Modifying one without the other is not possible.

SOLUTION

Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.

When changing the balance settings, the distribution setting is deselected.

When changing an distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.

There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).

The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings.

Modifying one without the other is not possible.

For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Treble,

Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,

CD...).

Modify the balance or distribution settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.

Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,

Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the

AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,

Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the

"None", musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.

404


QUESTION

With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use.

ANSWER

When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on the battery charge.

The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.

SOLUTION

Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.

Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait

(around 2 to 3 minutes).

USB, portable player, connection key

Some fi les supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).

Delete the fi les supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the fi le structure on the memory stick.

When I connect my iPhone as telephone and to the USB port at the same time, I am unable to play the music fi les.

When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the track being played with Apple ® players.

Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the

USB function takes priority over streaming).

When I connect my

Apple ® player, my

Blackberry ® or my connection key to the left hand USB port, I get an error message.

Apple players, Blackberry ® devices and connection keys draw more than

0.5 amp.

The left hand USB port is limited to 0.5 amp, the right hand USB port is limited to 1 amp.

Disconnect all devices from all the USB ports then reconnect the Apple ® player, Blackberry ® or connection key to the right hand USB port.

405

406

Alphabetical index

360 vision......................................................192

A

Accessories ................................................. 307

Accessory position........................................140

Accessory socket, 12V ................. 118, 122, 126

Access to the 3rd row .....................................96

Adjusting headlamps .................................... 211

Adjusting head restraints ..........................88, 93

Adjusting seat belt height ..............................230

Adjusting the steering wheel.........................103

Advice on care and maintenance ...............................................322

Airbags ....................................................48, 235

Airbags, curtain .....................................239, 240

Airbags, front.........................................236, 240

Airbags, lateral......................................238, 240

Air conditioning .......................................24, 105

Air conditioning, digital ..........................105, 109

Air conditioning, manual .......................105, 107

Air distribution adjustment ............ 106, 108, 111 r 321

Air flow ..........................................................104

Air flow adjustment ........................106, 107, 111

Air intake ............................................... 108, 112

Air recirculation ..................................... 108, 112

Air vents ........................................................104

Alarm ...............................................................79

Anti-pinch ................................................82, 220

Anti-theft........................................................140

Armrest, front ..................................................91

Assistance call ............................. 223, 335, 336

Audible warning ............................................222

Audio cable ...................................................356

Audio streaming (Bluetooth) ................ 352, 355

Automatic headlamps .............................40, 208

Automatic illumination of headlamps ......................................203, 207

Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps.............................................222

Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers .............................. 214, 217

Auxiliary ............................................... 352, 356

B

Backup starting .............................................295

Battery........................................... 295-297, 321

Battery, charging...........................................297

Battery, remote control .............................70, 71

Black panel ......................................................56

Blind for panoramic sunroof..........................

220

Blinds..................................................... 119, 126

Blind spot sensors.........................................186

Bluetooth (hands-free) ......................... 394, 395

Bluetooth (telephone) ........................... 394, 395

Bonnet...........................................................310

Bonnet stay ...................................................310

Boot ........................................................... 75-78

Boot (opening) .................................................61

Boot lamp ......................................................134

Brake discs....................................................322

Brake lamps .......................................... 283-287

Brake pads ....................................................322

Brakes ...........................................................322

C

Capacity, fuel tank ........................................ 313

CD .................................................................352

CD MP3.........................................................352

Central locking ....................................61, 64, 68

Changing a bulb .................................... 279-287

Changing a fuse.................................... 288-294

Changing a wheel ................................. 268-277

Changing a wiper blade ........................218, 299

Changing the date ...........................................57

Changing the remote control battery ...............................................70

Changing the time...........................................57

Checking levels..................................... 318-320

Checking the engine oil level ....................................................53, 318

Checking tyre pressures

(using the kit).................................................267

Checks .................................. 311, 312, 321, 322

Child lock .......................................................259

Children.........................103, 234, 236, 243-259

Child seats ........... 241, 242, 246-248, 250, 258

Child seats, conventional..............................247

103 r

Citroën Localised Assistance Call................336

Citroën Localised Emergency Call ...............336

CITROËN MULTICITY

CONNECT ..................................................389

Closing the boot ........................................75, 76

Closing the doors ................................62, 65, 67

Cold climate screen ......................................306

Colour screen................................................338

Concertina boards ..........................................97

Connectors, audio .........................................122

Coolant level .................................................319

Courtesy lamps .............................................219

Cruise control.................................167, 171, 174

Cruise control, active .................................... 174 r 118

Alphabetical index

D

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) ................351

Date (setting)...................................................57

Daytime running lamps .................210, 279, 281

Deactivating ESP ..........................................229

Deactivating the passenger airbag...............236

Deadlocking ....................................... 63, 66, 69

Defrosting.............................................. 114, 115

Demisting .............................................. 114, 115

Diesel ...................................................... 41, 316

Diesel additive level ......................................320

Diesel engine pre-heat warning lamp ............. 41

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) ................351

Dimensions ...........................................331, 332

Dipped beam.......................... 99, 202, 279, 280

Dipstick....................................................53, 318

Directional lighting ................................ 212, 213

Direction indicators ............... 222, 279, 282-286

Distance alert................................163, 182, 183

Doors...............................................................73

Doors back-up control .................................... 74

Driving positions (storing) ..............................87

Driving economically.......................................24

Dynamic emergency braking ........................145

Dynamic stability control (DSC) ........43, 47, 229

E

Eco-driving .....................................................24

Economy mode .............................................298

r 71, 140

Electronic stability programme (ESC) ..........227

Emergency boot release.................................78

Emergency call ............................ 223, 335, 336

Emergency warning lamps .................. 222, 223

Energy economy mode.................................298

Engine, Diesel................312, 316, 317, 325-327

Engine, petrol................................ 311, 316, 323

Engine compartment............................. 311, 312

Engine compartment fusebox .......................293

Engine oil ......................................................318

Engine oil level indicator .........................

r 53, 318

Engines ......................................... 323, 325-327

Environment ...... 24, 70, 105, 115, 224, 297, 320

ESC/ASR .......................................................227

F

Filling with fuel .............................. 313, 315, 316

Fitting a wheel ...............................................276

Fitting roof bars.............................................304

Fittings, rear ..................................................

r 125

Flashing indicators........................................222

Foglamps, front .............................204, 212, 282

Foglamps, rear..............................................

r 204

Folding the rear seats .................. 92, 94, 96, 97

Fragrance cartridge ...................................... 116

Frequency (radio) ................................. 349, 350

Front seats ..........................................84, 86, 87

Fuel............................................................... 316

Fuel consumption............................................24

Fuel filler cap................................................. 313

Fuel filler flap......................................... 313, 315

Fuel gauge ........................................33, 34, 313

Fuel tank................................................ 313, 315

Fusebox, dashboard .....................................290

Fuses .............................................................288

G

Gearbox, automatic ..............154, 160, 297, 322

Gearbox, electronic...............150, 160, 297, 322

Gearbox, manual ..........................149, 160, 322

Gear shift indicator ......................................................

159

Gear lever, manual gearbox.......................................................149

Gear selector ........................................

150, 154

Glove box .............................................. 118, 119

Guidance.......................................................358

Guide-me-home....................................206, 207

H

Halogen headlamps......................................279

Hands-free kit....................................... 394, 395

Hazard warning lamps ......................... 222, 223

Headlamp adjustment................................... 211

Headlamps, directional .........................213, 279

Headlamp wash ............................................216

Head restraints, front ......................................88

Head restraints, rear .......................................

r 93

Heated seats...................................................90

Heating.......................................... 106, 107, 109

Height and reach adjustment, steering wheel ............................................103

Hill start assist...............................................148

Hooks ............................................................130

.

407

408

Alphabetical index

I

Identification plates.......................................333

Ignition on......................................................140

Indicator lamps, status.............................. 38-50

Indicators, direction ............. 222, 282, 285, 287

Inflating accessories (using the kit) ..............267

Inflating tyres ..................................................24

Instrument panels .....................................33, 34

Instrument panel screen .........................35, 159

Intelligent Traction Control............................228

Interior fittings ....................................... 118, 119

Interior mood lighting ....................................221

ISOFIX child seats ................................ 252-256

ISOFIX mountings.........................................252

L

Labels, identification.....................................333

Lamps, warning and indicator...................

Lane Departure Warning System

38-50

(LDWS) .......................................................185

LED daytime running lamps..........................210

Leg rest, electric .............................................90

Level, brake fluid...........................................319

Level, headlamp wash ..................................320

Levels and checks................................. 310-322

Lighting, guide-me home ......................206, 207

Lighting, interior ....................................

219, 221

Lighting bulbs (replacement) ................ 279-287

Lighting control stalk ............................ 202, 206

Loading............................................................24

Load reduction mode ....................................298

Locating your vehicle ......................................63

Locking from the inside...................................72

Locking the doors ...........................................72

Low fuel level ................................................ 313

Luggage cover ..............................................

r r 132

Lumbar ............................................................

89

Mirror, rear view ............................................102

Mirrors, door..................................

101, 102, 186

Misfuel prevention......................................... 315

Modularity, seats.............................................99

Motorised boot ..........................................76, 77

Motorway function

(three flashes of the direction indicators)...222

Mountings for ISOFIX seats .........................252

r 127

N

Number plate lamps......................................287

J

Jack ....................................................... 268-270

Jack cable .....................................................356

JACK socket ..................................................356

Jukebox (playing) ..........................................357

K

Keeping children safe .... 103, 234, 236, 243-259

Key ..................................................... 61-71, 140

Key, electronic ........................................... 61-63

Keyless Entry and Starting ....................... 61-63

M

Main beam ...................... 40, 202, 279-281, 283

Maintenance....................................................24

Map reading lamps .......................................219

Markings, identification.................................333

Massage function ...........................................89

Mat ................................................................123

Memorising a speed .....................................167

Menu ................................... 342, 344, 346, 358,

360, 362, 378, 390, 392

O r 321

Oil level....................................................53, 318

Opening the bonnet ......................................310

Opening the boot ................................61, 64, 75

Opening the doors ....................................61, 64

Opening the panoramic sunroof blind ...............................................220

Operation indicator lamps ......................... 38-50

Alphabetical index

P

Paint colour code ..........................................333

Panoramic glass sunroof ..............................

Parcel shelf, rear...........................................

220 r 130

Park Assist ....................................................194

Parking brake, electric .......................... 141, 322

Parking lamps ...............................................206

Parking sensors, front ...................................190

Parking sensors, rear....................................

r

189

310, 319-321

Passenger compartment filter ......................

r 321

Port, USB ......................................................122

Priming the fuel system ................................ 317

Protecting children ........103, 234, 236, 243-259

Puncture........................................................260

r r

Replacing the oil filter ...................................

Replacing the passenger

321

321 r 321

Replacing wiper blades.........................218, 299

52

54 r r

Resetting the trip recorder..............................

Reversing camera .........................................191

Reversing lamp ..................................... 283-286

Risk areas (update).......................................367

Roof bars .......................................................304

Routine checks .....................................321, 322

Running out of fuel (Diesel) .......................... 317

Spare wheel ...........................................271-273

Speed limiter .........................................

167, 168

Spotlamps, side ....................................210, 283

Start ing using another battery .....................295

Starting the vehicle ............... 135, 137, 150, 154

Steering mounted controls............................341

Stopping the vehicle ............. 135, 137, 150, 154

Stop Start ............................... 60, 114, 160, 161,

295, 310, 313, 321

Storage.......................................................... 118

Storage boxes .......................................124, 126

Storing driving positions .................................87

Sun visor .......................................................

119

Synchronising the remote control...................70

Synthesiser, voice.........................................377

System settings .............................................386

R

Radio .............................................................348

RDS...............................................................350

Reading lamps, rear......................................

125

Rear foglamp ........................ 204, 283, 285, 287

Rear screen (demisting) ................................ 115

Recharging the battery .................................297

Reduction of electrical load ..........................298

Regeneration of the particle emissions filter .............................................................

321

Reinitialising the remote control .....................70

Remote control...........................................61-71

Removable screen (snow shield) ..................306

Removing a wheel ........................................ 274

Removing the mat.........................................123

Repair kit, puncture.......................................260

Replacing bulbs .................................... 279-287

Replacing fuses ............................................288

S

Safety for children.........103, 234, 236, 243-259

Scented air freshener ...................................

116

Screen menu....................... 342, 344, 346, 358,

360, 362, 378, 390, 392

Screenwash, front .........................................216

Screenwash fluid level ..................................320

Seat adjustment ........................................ 84-94

Seat belts .............................................. 230-234

Seat configurations.........................................99

Seats, electric .................................................86

Seats, rear.................................................

92-98

Serial number, vehicle ..................................333

51 r

Servicing .........................................................24

Setting the clock .............................................57

Sidelamps ............ 202, 206, 279, 281, 283, 285

Side repeater.................................................283

Snow chains..................................................278

T

Table of weights ............................ 324, 328-330

Tables of engines .......................... 323, 325-327

Tables of fuses..............................................288

Tank, fuel............................................... 313, 315

Technical data....................................... 323-330

Telephone .............................................394-398

Temperature adjustment ............... 106, 107, 109

Temperature control for heated seats ............90

Temporary tyre repair kit...............................260

TMC (Traffic info) ..........................................372

Tools ......................................................268, 270

Torch .............................................................134

.

409

410

Alphabetical index r 54

Touch screen.....................................55-58, 337

Towbar...........................................................

302

Towed loads .................................. 324, 328-330

Towing another vehicle .................................301

Traction control (ASR) ......................43, 47, 227

Traffic information (TA) .................................373

Traffic information (TMC)......................372, 373

Trailer ............................................................

Trip computer ............................................

r

302

58-60

54

Tyre pressures ......................262, 267, 277, 333

Tyres................................................................24

Tyre under-inflation detection .......................224

V

Vehicle identification .....................................333

Ventilation ...................... 104, 105, 107, 111, 114

Visibility ......................................................... 114

W

Warning lamps .......................................... 38-50

Warning triangle............................................223

r 215

Washing (advice)...........................................322

Weights ......................................... 324, 328-330

Welcome lighting ...........................................210

Window controls..............................................82

Wiper, rear.....................................................

215

Wiper control stalk ........................ 214, 215, 217

Wipers ............................................. 42, 214, 217

U

Under-inflation (detection) ............................224

Under floor storage .......................................130

Unlocking ..................................................61, 64

Unlocking from the inside ...............................72

Unlocking the boot ..........................................61

Unlocking the doors ........................................72

Update risk areas..........................................367

Updating the date............................................57

Updating the time............................................57

USB ...............................................................352

X

Xenon headlamps .........................................279

Visual search

Exterior

Electronic key / "Keyless Entry and

Starting" system 61-71

- opening / closing

- anti-theft protection

- back-up

- battery

Boot 75-78

- opening

- emergency release

Changing bulbs

- rear

- 3rd brake lamp

- number plate lamps

- foglamps

283-287

Parking sensors 189-190

Reversing camera 191

360 Vision 192-193

Park Assist

Towbar

194-201

302-303

Towing 300-301

Panoramic sunroof

Roof bars

Accessories

220

304-305

307-308

ESC, ABS, EBA, ASR, DSC 227-229

Tyre under-inflation detection 224-226

Tyre pressures


Changing a wheel

- tools

- removing / refitting

333

260-267

268-277

Snow chains 278

Wipers, screenwash


214-218

299

Exterior welcome lighting 210

Door mirror spotlamps 210

Cornering lighting 212

Directional lighting 213

Headlamp height adjustment

Changing bulbs

- front

- foglamps

- direction indicator repeaters

211

279-283

Door mirrors 101-102

Doors 73-74

- opening / closing

Central locking 72

Alarm 79-81

Electric windows 82-83

Fuel tank, misfuel prevention 313-315

.

411

412

Visual search

Interior

Interior fittings 125-128 rd row rear seats

Seat modularity /

96-98

Side blinds

Rear multimedia configurations 99-100

126

127-128

Seat belts

C4 Picasso boot fittings 129

- rings, hooks

- storage box

- boot lamp

Grand C4 Picasso boot fittings 131

- rings

- boot lamp

- concertina boards

Luggage cover roller 132-133

Warning triangle 223

230-234

Front fittings 118-124

Mats 123

Airbags 235-240

Deactivating the passenger's front airbag 236

2 nd row rear seats

Child seats

92-95

241-251

ISOFIX child seats 252-257

Child lock 259

Front seats

- manual

- electric

84-91

Visual search

Instruments and controls

Courtesy lamps 219

Rear view mirror 102

Panoramic sunroof 220

Automatic gearbox 154-158


Gear shift indicator

150-153

159

Door mirrors 101-102

Electric windows, deactivating 82-83

Opening the bonnet 310

5/6-speed manual gearbox 149

Gear shift indicator 159

Instrument panels 33-37

Lighting dimmer 55

Warning lamps 38-50

Indicators 51-53

- service indicator

- oil level indicator

Touch screen tablet 26-32

Equipment settings 28-30

Setting the date/time 57

GPS Navigation / Multimedia audio system / Bluetooth telephone 337-405

Ventilation 104-105

Heating 106

Dual-zone manual air conditioning 107-108

Dual-zone automatic air conditioning 109-114

Demisting / defrosting 114-115

Electric parking brake 141-147

.

413

414

Visual search

Instruments and controls (cont.)

START/STOP button 135-140

Lighting controls

Direction indicators

202-210

222

Headlamp height adjustment 211

Dashboard fuses 288-292

Memorising speeds 167

Speed limiter 168-170

Cruise control 171-173

Active cruise control 174-181

Wiper and screenwash controls 214-218

Trip computer 58-60

Steering wheel adjustment 103

Horn 222

Visual search

Maintenance - Technical data

Running out of fuel, Diesel 317

12V battery

Load reduction, economy mode

295-297

298

Engine compartment fuses

293-294

Diesel weights 328-330

Checking levels

- oil

- brake fluid

- coolant

318-320

- screenwash/headlamp wash fluid

Checking components

- air filter

321-322

- passenger compartment filter

- oil filter

- electric parking brake

- brake

Changing bulbs

- front

- rear

279-287

Opening the bonnet

Under the bonnet, petrol

310

311

Under the bonnet, Diesel 312

Petrol engines 323

Diesel engines 325-327

Identification markings 333

Dimensions 331-332

.

415

This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole range.

Your vehicle will be

fi

tted with some of this equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the speci

fi

cation for the country in which it is sold.

The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation. Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the technical speci

fi

cations, equipment and accessories without having to update this edition of the handbook.

This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.

Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application of the provisions of the European regulation

(Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.

Reproduction or translation of all or part of this handbook is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles CITROËN.

For any work on your vehicle, use a quali

fi

ed workshop that has the technical information, competence and equipment required, which a

CITROËN dealer is able to provide. Printed in the EU

Anglais

03-13

13B78.0041

Anglais

2013 – DOCUMENTATION DE BORD

4Dconcept

Diadeis

Edipro

CRÉATIVE TECHNOLOGIE